Brother MFC 9970CDW Multifunction Printer User's Guide

Brother MFC 9970CDW Multifunction Printer User's Guide
Add to My manuals

Below you will find brief information for Multifunction Printer MFC 9970CDW. This machine combines the functions of a printer, scanner, copier, and fax, so you can perform all your office tasks in one place. You can print documents, scan to a computer, copy documents, and send and receive faxes. The MFC 9970CDW also has a large touchscreen display for easy navigation, and a variety of features to make your work easier.

advertisement

Assistant Bot

Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.

Brother MFC 9970CDW User's Guide | Manualzz

PANTONE2728

®

User

’ s Guide

Safety and Legal

Basic User’s Guide

Advanced User’s Guide

Safety and Legal

(HL-4140CN / 4150CDN / 4570CDW(T) / DCP-9055CDN / 9270CDN / MFC-9460CDN / 9465CDN / 9970CDW)

A

Not all models are available in all countries.

Please read this booklet before attempting to operate the product, or before attempting any maintenance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in an increased risk of fire, electrical shock, burns or suffocation.

Symbols and conventions used in the documentation

The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.

A

Bold

Italics

Courier

New

Bold typeface identifies specific buttons on the product’s control panel, on the computer screen.

Italicized typeface emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.

Text in the Courier New font identifies messages on the

LCD of the product.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the operation works with other features.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.

Improper Setup icons alert you to devices and operations that are not compatible with the product.

Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch product parts that are hot.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

Note

The illustrations in this guide show the

HL-4150CDN and MFC-9460CDN.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.

Version B

UK/IRE

1

2

Compilation and Publication

Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.

A

Choosing a location

Put your product on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk.

Put the product near a telephone socket and a standard grounded electrical socket. Choose a location where the temperature remains between 10

°C and 32.5°C and the humidity is between

20% to 80% (without condensation).

A

WARNING

DO NOT expose the product to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive gasses, moisture or dust.

DO NOT place the product near heaters, air conditioners, desk fan, refrigerators, water or chemicals.

CAUTION

Avoid placing your product in a high-traffic area.

DO NOT put the product where the ventilation holes of the product are blocked. Keep a gap of roughly 100 mm between the ventilation holes and the wall.

DO NOT connect your product to electrical sockets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers, or to the same circuit as large appliances that might disrupt the power supply.

Disruption of power can delete information from the product’s memory.

Avoid interference sources, such as other cordless telephone systems or speakers.

Make sure cables leading to the product do not constitute a trip hazard.

DO NOT eat the Silica Pack. Discard immediately.

3

4

To use the product safely

WARNING

There are high voltage electrodes inside the product. Before you clean the inside of the product, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first (MFC only) and then the power cord from the electrical socket. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.

A

DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.

Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.

This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of an emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off the power completely.

Plastic bags are used in the packing of your product and drum unit. Plastic bags are not toys.

To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose of them properly.

DO NOT use flammable substances near the product. DO NOT use any type of spray to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock. See Routine

Maintenance in the User's Guide/Basic User's Guide for how to clean the product.

DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

5

• This product is heavy and weighs more than 21.0 kg for Printer, and more than 26.5 kg for

MFC/DCP. To prevent injuries when moving or lifting this product, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you set the product back down.

• If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately from your product.

6

(MFC only)

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall socket.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket in a wet location.

(MFC only)

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:

1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or washing product, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

4 We DO NOT advise using an extension lead.

5 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket in a wet location.

6 If any cables become damaged, disconnect your product, and contact your Brother dealer.

7 DO NOT place any objects on the product, or obstruct the air vents.

8 This product should be connected to an adjacent grounded AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.

Languages on the label may vary depending on your country.

7

8

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the product, some internal parts of the product will be extremely hot.

Wait for the product to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the product.

(MFC-9460CDN / MFC-9465CDN / DCP-9055CDN only)

Some areas of the product can cause injury if covers (shaded) are closed with force. Take care when placing your hand in the areas shown in the illustrations.

(MFC and DCP only)

To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations.

9

IMPORTANT

DO NOT remove or damage any of the caution or warning labels inside the product.

10

Important safety instructions

1 Read all of these instructions.

2 Save them for later reference.

3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

4 Unplug this product from the wall socket before cleaning inside of the product. DO NOT use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a dry, lint-free soft cloth for cleaning.

5 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

6 Slots and openings in the casing at the back or bottom are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless adequate ventilation is provided.

7 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.

8 This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded plug.

9 Use only the power cord supplied with this product.

10 DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people can walk on the cord.

11 Use the product in a well-ventilated area.

12 The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 5 metres.

DO NOT share the same power circuit with other high powered appliances, such as an air conditioner, copier, shredder, and so on.

13 DO NOT place anything in front of the product that will block received faxes or printed pages.

DO NOT place anything in the path of received faxes or printed pages.

14 Wait until pages have exited the product before picking them up.

15 Unplug this product from the power socket and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized Service

Personnel under the following conditions:

 When the power cord is damaged or frayed.

 If liquid has been spilled into the product.

 If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.

Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Incorrect adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

A

11

 If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.

 If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.

16 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection device (Surge Protector).

17 To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people, note the following:

DO NOT use this product near appliances that use water, a swimming pool or in a wet basement.

 DO NOT use the product during an electrical storm (there is the remote possibility of an electrical shock) or to report a gas leak (MFC only) in the vicinity of the leak.

 DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak.

12

Regulation

Approval Information (MFC only)

THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH A TWO WIRE ANALOGUE PSTN LINE

FITTED WITH THE APPROPRIATE CONNECTOR.

Brother advises that this product may not function correctly in a country other than where it was originally purchased, and does not offer any warranty in the event that this product is used on public telecommunication lines in another country.

A

Declaration of Conformity (Europe only)

(HL-4570CDW / HL-4570CDWT / MFC-9460CDN / MFC-9465CDN /

MFC-9970CDW only)

A

We, Brother Industries, Ltd.

15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements of Directives

1999/5/EC and 2005/32/EC.

The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) is on our Website.

Please go to http://solutions.brother.com/.

i

choose region (eg. Europe) i

choose country i

choose your model i

choose “Manuals” i

choose Declaration of Conformity (Select Language when required.)

A

13

Declaration of Conformity (Europe only)

(HL-4140CN / HL-4150CDN / DCP-9055CDN / DCP-9270CDN only)

A

We, Brother Industries, Ltd.

15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements of Directives

2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2005/32/EC.

The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) is on our Website.

Please go to http://solutions.brother.com/.

i

choose region (eg. Europe) i

choose country i

choose your model i

choose “Manuals” i

choose Declaration of Conformity (Select Language when required.)

IEC60825-1:2007 Specification (For 220-240V Models Only)

This product is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC60825-1:2007 specifications. The label shown below is attached in countries where required.

A

This product has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner Unit. The Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

Internal Laser radiation

Wave length: 770 - 800 nm

Output: 20 mW max.

Laser Class: Class 3B

WARNING

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

A

14

Disconnect device

This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off power completely.

A

Wiring information (U.K. only)

If you need to replace the plug fuse, fit a fuse that is approved by ASTA to BS1362 with the same rating as the original fuse.

Always replace the fuse cover. Never use a plug that does not have a cover. If in any doubt, call a qualified electrician.

Warning -This product must be earthed.

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in line with the following code:

 Green and Yellow: Earth

 Blue: Neutral

 Brown: Live

A

LAN connection (Network models only)

A

CAUTION

DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.

Radio interference

This product complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.

A

15

EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN50419

This equipment is marked with the above recycling symbol. It means that at the end of the life of the equipment you must dispose of it separately at an appropriate collection point and not place it in the normal domestic unsorted waste stream. This will benefit the environment for all.

(European Union only)

International ENERGY STAR

®

HL-4140CN)

Qualification Statement (except

A

The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR

®

Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.

As an ENERGY STAR

®

Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR

®

specifications for energy efficiency.

A

16

Trademarks

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United

States and other countries.

Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Corel and CorelDRAW are trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.

Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.

A

17

Open Source Licensing Remarks

This product includes open-source software.

Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.

(For Windows

®

) “X:\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).

(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities icon. License.rtf will appear.

A

Copyright and License

©2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.

This product includes software developed by the following vendors:

©1983-1998 PACIFIC SOFTWORKS, INC.

©2010 Devicescape Software, Inc.

This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.

A

Other Information (MFC only)

FlashFX

®

is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.

FlashFX

®

Copyright 1998-2010 Datalight, Inc.

U.S.Patent Office 5,860,082/6,260,156

FlashFX

®

Pro™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.

Reliance™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.

Datalight

®

is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.

Copyright 1989-2010 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved

A

18

Unlawful use of copying equipment

(MFC and DCP only)

It is an offence to make reproductions of certain items or documents with the intent to commit fraud. The following is a non-exhaustive list of documents which it may be unlawful to produce copies of. We suggest you check with your legal adviser and/or the relevant legal authorities if in doubt about a particular item or document:

 Currency

 Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

 Certificates of Deposit

 Armed forces service or draft papers

 Passports

Postage stamps (cancelled or uncancelled)

 Immigration papers

 Welfare documents

 Cheques or drafts drawn by governmental agencies

 Identifying badges or insignias

In addition, driving licenses and/or Certificates of Title to motor vehicles may not be copied under certain national laws.

Copyrighted works cannot be copied lawfully, subject to the “fair dealing” exception relating to sections of a copyrighted work. Multiple copies would indicate improper use. Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.

A

19

BASIC USER’S GUIDE

MFC-9970CDW

Version 0

UK/IRE

If you need to call Customer Service

Please complete the following information for future reference:

Model Number: MFC-9970CDW

Serial Number:

1

Date of Purchase:

Place of Purchase:

1

The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain this User’s Guide with your sales receipt as a permanent record of your purchase, in the event of theft, fire or warranty service.

Register your product on-line at

http://www.brother.com/registration/

© 2010 Brother Industries, Ltd.

User's Guides and where do I find it?

Which manual?

Safety and Legal

Quick Setup Guide

What's in it?

Read this Guide first. Please read the

Safety Instructions before you set up your machine. See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.

Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.

Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and

Direct Print operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.

Where is it?

Printed / In the box

Printed / In the box

Basic User's Guide

Advanced User's Guide

Learn more advanced operations: Fax,

Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.

Software User's Guide

Follow these instructions for Printing,

Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote

Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother

ControlCenter utility.

Network Glossary

Network User's Guide

This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of

Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.

This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the

Brother machine. You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.

Printed / In the box

For

HUN/BUL/ROM/POL/SVK/CZE:

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

i

ii

Table of Contents

(BASIC USER’S GUIDE)

1

2

3

4

General information 1

Using the documentation .......................................................................................1

Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................1

Accessing the Advanced User’s Guide, Software User’s Guide and

Network User’s Guide.........................................................................................2

Viewing Documentation ...................................................................................2

Accessing Brother Support (Windows

®

)................................................................4

Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) ................................................................4

Control panel overview ..........................................................................................6

LCD Touchscreen............................................................................................8

Basic Operations .............................................................................................9

Volume settings ...................................................................................................10

Ring volume...................................................................................................10

Beeper volume ..............................................................................................10

Speaker volume.............................................................................................10

Loading paper 11

Loading paper and print media ............................................................................11

Loading paper in the standard paper tray......................................................11

Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray) ........................................13

Unscannable and unprintable areas ..............................................................17

Paper settings......................................................................................................18

Paper Size and Type .....................................................................................18

Tray Use in copy mode..................................................................................19

Tray Use in fax mode ....................................................................................19

Tray Use in print mode ..................................................................................20

Acceptable paper and other print media..............................................................21

Recommended paper and print media ..........................................................21

Type and size of paper ..................................................................................21

Handling and using special paper .................................................................23

Loading documents 26

How to load documents .......................................................................................26

Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................26

Using the scanner glass ................................................................................27

Sending a fax 28

How to send a fax ................................................................................................28

Faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass................29

Colour fax transmission .................................................................................30

Cancelling a fax in progress ..........................................................................30

Transmission verification report.....................................................................30

5

6

7

8

Receiving a fax 32

Receive modes.................................................................................................... 32

Choosing the receive mode...........................................................................32

Using receive modes ........................................................................................... 33

Fax Only ........................................................................................................ 33

Fax/Tel........................................................................................................... 33

Manual........................................................................................................... 33

External TAD ................................................................................................. 33

Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................ 34

Ring Delay .....................................................................................................34

F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................34

Fax Detect .....................................................................................................35

Telephone and external devices 36

Telephone line services.......................................................................................36

Setting the telephone line type ......................................................................36

Connecting an external TAD................................................................................37

Connections...................................................................................................37

Recording an outgoing message (OGM)....................................................... 38

Multi-line connections (PBX) .........................................................................38

External and extension telephones......................................................................39

Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................39

Operation from external or extension telephones..........................................39

For Fax/Tel mode only................................................................................... 39

Using extension telephones (U.K. only) ........................................................39

Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................40

Using Remote Codes ....................................................................................41

Dialling and storing numbers 42

How to dial........................................................................................................... 42

Manual dialling............................................................................................... 42

One Touch dialling.........................................................................................42

Speed dialling ................................................................................................42

Search ........................................................................................................... 43

LDAP search ................................................................................................. 43

Fax redial.......................................................................................................43

Storing numbers .................................................................................................. 44

Storing a pause ............................................................................................. 44

One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options ................................................ 45

Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................46

Storing Speed Dial numbers.......................................................................... 48

Changing or Deleting One Touch and Speed Dial numbers .........................49

Tone or Pulse ................................................................................................50

Making copies 51

How to copy......................................................................................................... 51

Stop copying.................................................................................................. 51

Copy settings................................................................................................. 51

iii

iv

9 Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage 52

Creating a PRN or PostScript

®

3™ file for direct printing ....................................52

Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage ..................................................................................53

Changing the default settings for direct print .................................................54

10 How to print from a computer 55

Printing a document.............................................................................................55

11 How to scan to a computer 56

Scanning a document ..........................................................................................56

Scanning using the scan key ...............................................................................56

Scanning using a scanner driver .........................................................................57

A Routine maintenance 58

Replacing the consumable items.........................................................................58

Replacing a Toner cartridge ..........................................................................62

Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................68

Replacing the belt unit ...................................................................................74

Replacing the waste toner box ......................................................................80

Cleaning and Checking the machine ...................................................................87

Cleaning the outside of the machine .............................................................87

Cleaning the scanner glass ...........................................................................88

Cleaning the laser scanner windows .............................................................89

Cleaning the corona wires .............................................................................93

Cleaning the drum unit ..................................................................................97

Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers...............................................................103

Calibration ...................................................................................................104

Auto Registration .........................................................................................105

Manual Registration.....................................................................................106

Frequency (Colour Correction) ....................................................................106

B Troubleshooting 107

Error and maintenance messages.....................................................................107

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................114

Document jams..................................................................................................115

Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit ..........................................115

Document is jammed under the document cover ........................................115

Removing small documents jammed in the ADF.........................................116

Document is jammed at the output tray .......................................................116

Paper jams.........................................................................................................117

Paper is jammed in the MP tray ..................................................................117

Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2 ...................................................118

Paper is jammed at the back of the machine ..............................................119

Paper is jammed inside the machine...........................................................121

Paper is jammed underneath paper tray 1 ..................................................125

C

D

E

If you are having difficulty with your machine ....................................................128

Setting Dial Tone detection .........................................................................137

Telephone line interference / VoIP .............................................................. 137

Improving the print quality..................................................................................138

Machine Information ..........................................................................................145

Checking the Serial Number........................................................................ 145

Reset functions............................................................................................145

How to reset the machine............................................................................ 146

Menu and features 147

On-screen programming.................................................................................... 147

Menu table...................................................................................................147

MENU button and mode keys............................................................................ 147

Menu table......................................................................................................... 148

Entering text ...................................................................................................... 183

Specifications 184

General.............................................................................................................. 184

Document Size .................................................................................................. 186

Print media......................................................................................................... 187

Fax..................................................................................................................... 189

Copy .................................................................................................................. 190

Scanner ............................................................................................................. 191

Printer ................................................................................................................ 192

Interfaces........................................................................................................... 193

Direct Print feature............................................................................................. 194

Scan to USB feature..........................................................................................195

Computer requirements .................................................................................... 196

Consumable items............................................................................................. 198

Network (LAN) ...................................................................................................199

Index 200

v

vi

Table of Contents

(ADVANCED USER’S GUIDE)

The Advanced User's Guide explains the following features and operations.

You can view the Advanced User's Guide on the Documentation CD-ROM in the box.

1 General Setup

Memory storage

Automatic daylight savings time

Ecology features

LCD screen

Mode Timer

2 Security features

Secure Function Lock 2.0

Setting Lock

Restricting dialling

3 Sending a fax

Additional sending options

Additional sending operations

Polling overview

4 Receiving a fax

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Additional receiving operations

Polling overview

5 Dialling and storing numbers

Telephone line services

Additional dialling operations

Additional ways to store numbers

6 Printing reports

Fax reports

Reports

7 Making copies

Copy settings

A Routine maintenance

Cleaning and checking the machine

Replacing periodic maintenance parts

Packing and shipping the machine

B Options

Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)

Memory board

C Glossary

D Index

1

General information

Using the documentation

Thank you for buying a Brother machine!

Reading the documentation will help you make the most of your machine.

1

Symbols and conventions used in the documentation

The following symbols and conventions are used throughout the documentation.

1

Bold

Italics

Courier

New

Bold style identifies keys on the machine control panel or computer screen.

Italicized style emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.

Courier New font identifies the messages shown on the LCD of the machine.

1

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a possible electrical shock.

Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch machine parts that are hot.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about how the current operation works with other features.

1

1

2

Chapter 1

Accessing the

Advanced User’s

Guide, Software User’s

Guide and Network

User’s Guide

1

This Basic User's Guide does not contain all the information about the machine such as how to use the advanced features Fax, Copy,

Printer, Scanner, PC-Fax and Network.

When you are ready to learn detailed information about these operations, read the

Advanced User's Guide, Software User’s

Guide, Network User’s Guide, and

Network Glossary that are on the

Documentation CD-ROM.

Viewing Documentation

a

Turn on your computer. Insert the

Documentation CD-ROM into your

CD-ROM drive.

Note

(Windows

®

users) If the screen does not appear automatically, go to My Computer

(Computer), double-click the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click index.html.

b

(Macintosh users) Double-click the

Documentation CD-ROM icon, and then double-click index.html.

1

c

Click your country.

d

Point to your language, point to

View Guide, and then click the guide you want to read.

Note

• (Windows

®

users only) Your web browser may display a yellow bar at the top of the page that contains a security warning about Active X controls. For the page to be displayed correctly, you must click on

Allow Blocked Content, then click on

Yes in the Security Warning dialog box.

• (Windows

®

users only)

1

For faster

access, you can copy all user documentation in PDF format to a local folder on your computer. Point to your language, then click Copy to local disk.

1

Microsoft

®

Internet Explorer

®

6.0 or greater.

How to find Scanning instructions

There are several ways you can scan documents. You can find the instructions as follows:

Software User's Guide

1

Scanning

ControlCenter

Network Scanning

ScanSoft™ PaperPort™12SE with OCR

How-to-Guides

(Windows

®

)

 The complete ScanSoft™

PaperPort™12SE with OCR How-to-

Guides can be viewed from the Help section in the ScanSoft™

PaperPort™12SE application.

General information

Presto! PageManager User’s Guide

(Macintosh)

Note

Presto! PageManager must be downloaded and installed before use. See

Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for further instructions.

 The complete Presto! PageManager

User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help section in the Presto! PageManager application.

How to find Network setup instructions

Your machine can be connected to a wireless or wired network. You can find basic setup instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your wireless access point or router supports Wi-Fi

Protected Setup or AOSS™, you can also follow the steps in the Quick Setup Guide. For more information about network setup please see the Network User's Guide on the

Documentation CD-ROM.

1

3

Chapter 1

Accessing Brother

Support (Windows

®

)

You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions

Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.

 Click Brother Support on the main menu.

The following screen will appear:

1

Accessing Brother

Support (Macintosh)

You can find all the contacts you will need, such as Web support (Brother Solutions

Center) on the Installation CD-ROM.

 Double-click the Brother Support icon.

The following screen will appear:

1

4

 To access our website

(http://www.brother.com/), click Brother

Home Page.

 For the latest news and product support information

(http://solutions.brother.com/), click

Brother Solutions Center.

 To visit our website for original Brother

Supplies

(http://www.brother.com/original/), click

Supplies Information.

To access the Brother CreativeCenter

(http://www.brother.com/creativecenter/) for FREE photo projects and printable downloads, click Brother

CreativeCenter.

 To return to the main page, click Back or if you have finished, click Exit.

To download and install Presto!

PageManager, click

Presto! PageManager.

 To register your machine from the Brother

Product Register Page

(http://www.brother.com/registration/), click On-Line Registration.

 For the latest news and product support information

(http://solutions.brother.com/), click

Brother Solutions Center.

 To visit our website for original Brother

Supplies

(http://www.brother.com/original/), click

Supplies Information.

General information

1

5

6

Chapter 1

Control panel overview

1 2

01.01.2011 15:15

03

Address

Book

MENU

Secure

Print

Direct

Print

Fax

1

1 One Touch keys

These 20 keys give you instant access to 40 previously stored numbers.

21-40 b

The 21-40 b lets you access One Touch numbers 21 to 40 when held down.

2 LCD

This is a Touchscreen LCD. You can access the menus and options by pressing buttons displayed on the screen.

3 Mode keys:

FAX

Puts the machine in Fax mode.

SCAN

Puts the machine in Scan mode.

COPY

Puts the machine in Copy mode.

4 Dial pad

Use these keys to dial telephone and fax numbers and as a keyboard for entering information into the machine.

This function transfers to the touchscreen when you store quick dial numbers.

The # key temporarily switches the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone during a telephone call.

5 Stop/Exit

Stops an operation or exits from a menu.

6 Start:

Colour

Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in full colour.

Mono

Lets you start sending faxes or making copies in black & white.

General information

2

01.01.2011 15:15

03

Address

Book

MENU

Secure

Print

Direct

Print

Fax

3 4 5

1

7 FAX keys:

Tel/R

This key is used to have a telephone conversation after picking up the external handset during the F/T fast double-ring.

When connected to a PBX, you can use this key to gain access to an outside line, to recall an operator, or to transfer a call to another extension.

Redial/Pause

Redials the last number called. It also inserts a pause when programming quick dial numbers or when dialling a number manually.

8 Print Data / Job Cancel

Cancels a programmed print job and clears it from the machine’s memory. To cancel multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the

LCD shows Cancel Printing (All).

Also, this key will flash depending on the machine’s status.

8 7 6

Machine Status Description

Ready Mode The machine is ready to print, in sleep mode, there is no print data, or the power switch is off.

Receiving Data The machine is either receiving data from the computer, processing data in memory, or printing data.

Green (blinking)

Data Remaining in Memory

Print data remains in the machine memory.

Green

7

8

Chapter 1

LCD Touchscreen

The LCD Touchscreen shows the current machine status when the machine is idle.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

01.01.2011 15:15

03

Fax

Address

Book

MENU

Secure

Print

Direct

Print

Setting Lock

11 10 9 8

1 Date and Time

Lets you see date and time.

2 MENU

Lets you access the main menu.

3 Fax duplex (2–sided) receiving indicator

Appears when duplex printing is set to on for received faxes.

4 Secure Print

Lets you access the secure print menu.

Active only when the machine has secure print data.

5 Fax in memory

Shows how many received faxes are in the memory.

6 Wireless Status

In FAX mode and SCAN mode a four level indicator shows the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection.

0 Max

7 Current Receive Mode

Lets you see the current receive mode.

Fax

(Fax only)

F/T

(Fax/Tel)

TAD

(External TAD)

Mnl

(Manual)

8 Direct Print

Lets you print data from a USB flash memory drive or a digital camera supporting mass

storage directly to the machine. (See Printing

data directly from the USB Flash memory drive

or digital camera supporting mass storage on page 53.)

Active only when you insert a USB flash memory drive or digital camera in the machine's USB direct interface.

9 Security indicator

Shows machine's security status. Appears when you turn on Secure Function Lock or

Setting Lock.

10 Warning icon

Appears when there is an error or maintenance message; press the Warning icon to view it, and then press Stop/Exit to return to the

Ready screen.

11 Address Book

Lets you search the number you want to fax/dial/E-mail/I-Fax.

Basic Operations

To operate the Touchscreen use your finger to press the menu or option button directly on the LCD screen.

To display and access all the screen menus or options in a setting, press a b or d c to scroll through them.

Press to return to the previous menu.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT press the Touchscreen with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.

1

The following steps show how to change a setting in the machine. In this example the

LCD back light setting is changed from

Light

to Dark.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

MENU

General Setup

Fax

Printer

Print Reports c

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.

Press LCD Settings.

MENU

General Setup

Mode Timer

Tray Setting

Volume

Ecology d

Press Backlight.

MENU > General Setup

LCD Settings

Backlight

Dim Timer

Light

Off

General information e

Press Dark.

MEMU > General Setup > LCD Settings

Backlight

Light

Dark f

Press Stop/Exit.

Med

1

9

Chapter 1

Volume settings

Ring volume

You can choose a range of ring volume levels, from High to Off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Volume.

Press Volume.

d

Press Ring.

e

Press Low, Med, High or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Beeper volume

When the beeper is on, the machine will beep when you press a key, make a mistake, or after you send or receive a fax. You can choose a range of volume levels, from High to Off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Volume.

Press Volume.

d

Press Beeper.

e

Press Low, Med, High or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

1

1

Speaker volume

You can choose a range of speaker volume levels, from High to Off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Volume.

Press Volume.

d

Press Speaker.

e

Press Low, Med, High or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

10

2

Loading paper

2

Loading paper and print media

The machine can feed paper from the standard paper tray, optional lower tray or multi-purpose tray.

When you put paper into the paper tray, note the following:

If your application software supports paper size selection on the print menu, you can select it through the software. If your application software does not support it, you can set the paper size in the printer driver or by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

2

Loading paper in the standard paper tray

2

You can load up to 250 sheets for Tray 1 and

500 sheets for the optional lower tray

(Tray 2). Paper can be loaded up to the maximum paper mark (b b b) on the sliding paper width guide. (For recommended paper

to use, see Paper capacity of the paper trays on page 22.)

Printing on plain paper, thin paper or recycled paper from the standard paper tray (Tray 1)

2

a

Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

2

WARNING

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.

11

Chapter 2 b

While pressing the green paper-guide release lever (1), slide the paper guides to fit the paper size you are loading in the tray. Make sure that the guides are firmly in the slots.

d

Put paper in the tray and make sure:

 The paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b) (1).

Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.

 The side to be printed on must be

face down.

The paper guides touch the sides of the paper so it will feed properly.

1

1 c

Fan the stack of paper well to avoid paper jams and misfeeds.

e

Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine. Make sure that it is completely inserted into the machine.

f

Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent paper from sliding off the face-down output tray or remove each page as soon as it comes out of the machine.

1

12

Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray (MP tray)

2

You can load up to 3 envelopes or special print media in the MP tray or up to 50 sheets of plain paper. Use this tray to print or copy on thick paper, bond paper, glossy paper, labels, or envelopes. (For recommended paper to

use, see Paper capacity of the paper trays on page 22.)

Printing on plain paper, bond paper, labels or glossy paper from the MP tray

2

a

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

Loading paper b

Pull out the MP tray support and unfold the flap (1).

1

2

13

Chapter 2 c

Put paper in the MP tray and make sure:

 The paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1).

 The top of paper edge is positioned between the arrows (2).

 The side to be printed on must be

face up with the leading edge (top of the paper) in first.

1

d

Lift up the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face-down output tray, or remove each page as soon as it comes out of the machine.

2

14

Note

When you are using glossy paper, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.

Printing on envelopes and thick paper from the MP tray

2

Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.

Loading paper b

Pull out the MP tray support and unfold the flap (1).

2

a

Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

1

c

Lift up the support flap to prevent envelopes or thick sheets of paper from sliding off the face-down output tray. If the support flap is closed you should remove each envelope as soon as it comes out of the machine.

d

Put up to 3 envelopes or up to 25 sheets of thick paper (163 g/m

2

) in the MP tray.

If you add more envelopes or paper it may cause a jam. Make sure:

 The top edge of the envelope is positioned between the arrows (1).

 The side to be printed on must be

face up.

15

Chapter 2 f

Pull down the two grey levers, one on the left-hand side and one on the righthand side, to the envelope position as shown in the illustration below.

1 e

Open the back cover (Face-up output tray).

g

Close the back cover.

h

Send the print data to the machine.

i

When you have finished printing, open the back cover and reset the two grey levers which were pulled down in

step f back to their original positions.

Note

• Remove each printed envelope immediately to prevent a paper jam.

• If your thick paper curls during printing, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray and open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed pages exit to the face-up output tray.

16

Loading paper

Unscannable and unprintable areas

The figures below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas. The unscannable and unprintable areas may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you are using.

2

2

1

2

2

Usage Document

Size

Fax (Sending) Letter

1

A4

Copy

*

Letter

* a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy

Scan

A4

Letter

Print

A4

Letter

A4

4 mm

3 mm

3 mm

4 mm

4 mm

Top (1)

Bottom (1)

3 mm

3 mm

4 mm

4 mm

3 mm

3 mm

4 mm

4 mm

Left (2)

Right (2)

4 mm

3 mm

4 mm

17

Chapter 2

Paper settings

Paper Size and Type

When you change the size of paper in the tray, you will also need to change the setting for paper size at the same time so your machine can fit the document or an incoming fax on the page.

You can use the following sizes of paper for printing copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive,

A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio and the following sizes for printing faxes: A4, Letter,

Legal or Folio (8.5 in.

× 13 in.).

Following on the paper size setting, you can set up the machine for the type of paper you are using. This will give you the best print quality.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.

Press Tray Setting.

d

Do one of the following:

 To set the paper type for the

MP Tray

press a or b to display

MP Tray

.

Press MP Tray

 To set the paper type for Tray#1 press a or b to display Tray#1.

Press Tray#1

 To set the paper type for Tray#2 press a or b to display Tray#2.

Press Tray#2

optional tray.

1

if you installed the

1

The Tray#2 button will be selectable if the optional tray is installed.

2

2

e

Press d or c to display the paper size options.

Press A4, Letter, Legal,

Executive

, A5, A5 L, A6, B5, B6,

Folio

or Any.

Note

• The Any option appears only when you choose the MP tray.

• If you choose Any for the MP Tray Paper

Size: You must choose MP Only for the

Tray Use setting. You cannot use the Any

Paper Size selection for the MP tray when making N in 1 copies. You must choose one of the other available Paper Size selections for the MP tray.

• A5 L and A6 size are not available for

Tray#2

.

f

Press Thin, Plain, Thick, Thicker,

Recycled Paper

or Glossy. g

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You can choose Glossy for the

MP Tray

.

18

Tray Use in copy mode

You can change the priority tray that the machine will use for printing copies.

When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only or Tray#2 Only

1

, the machine pulls the paper only from that tray. If the selected tray is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the

LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.

To change the tray setting follow the instructions below: a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.

Press Tray Setting.

d

Press a or b to display

Tray Use:Copy

.

Press Tray Use:Copy.

e

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only

1

,

MP Only

, MP>T1>T2

1

or T1>T2

1

>MP

.

1

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

• When loading the documents in the ADF and MP>T1>T2 or T1>T2>MP is selected, the machine looks for the tray with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray. If no tray has suitable paper, the machine pulls paper from the higher priority tray.

• When using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.

2

Loading paper

Tray Use in fax mode

You can change the default tray that the machine will use for printing received faxes.

When you choose Tray#1 Only, MP Only

or Tray#2 Only

1

, the machine pulls the paper only from that tray. If the selected tray is out of paper, No Paper will appear on the

LCD. Insert the paper in the empty tray.

When you choose T1>T2

1

>MP

, the machine pulls paper from Tray #1 until it is empty, then from Tray #2, and then from the MP tray.

When you choose MP>T1>T2

1

, the machine

pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, then from Tray #1, and then from Tray #2.

2

Note

• You can use four sizes of paper for printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or Folio.

When a suitable size is not in any of the trays received faxes will be stored in the machine’s memory and Size mismatch will appear on the LCD. (For details, see

Error and maintenance messages on page 107.)

• If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory,

No Paper

will appear on the LCD. Insert paper in the empty tray.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.

Press Tray Setting.

d

Press a or b to display Tray Use:Fax.

Press Tray Use:Fax.

e

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only

1

,

MP Only

, MP>T1>T2

1

or T1>T2

1

>MP

.

1

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

19

2

Chapter 2

Tray Use in print mode

You can change the default tray the machine will use for printing from your computer. a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Tray Setting.

Press Tray Setting.

d

Press a or b to display

Tray Use:Print

.

Press Tray Use:Print.

e

Press Tray#1 Only, Tray#2 Only

1

,

MP Only

, MP>T1>T2

1

or T1>T2

1

>MP

.

1

The Tray#2 Only or T2 appears only if the optional tray is installed.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

2

20

Acceptable paper and other print media

2

Print quality may vary according to the type of paper you are using.

You can use the following types of print media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper, glossy paper, labels or envelopes.

For best results, follow the instructions below:

 DO NOT put different types of paper in the paper tray at the same time because it may cause paper jams or misfeeds.

 For correct printing, you must choose the same paper size from your software application as the paper in the tray.

 Avoid touching the printed surface of the paper immediately after printing.

Before you buy a lot of paper, test a small quantity to make sure the paper is suitable.

Loading paper

Recommended paper and print media

2

Paper Type

Plain paper

Item

Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m

2

Xerox Business 80 g/m

2

Recycled Paper Xerox Recycled Supreme

80 g/m

2

Labels

Envelope

Glossy Paper

Avery laser label L7163

Antalis River series (DL)

International Paper Rey

Color Laser Gloss 140g/m

2

A4

Type and size of paper

The machine feeds paper from the installed standard paper tray, multi-purpose tray or optional lower tray.

2

The name for the paper trays in the printer driver in this Guide are as follows:

2

Tray and optional unit

Standard paper tray

Multi-purpose tray

Optional lower tray

Name

Tray 1

MP Tray

Tray 2

2

21

Chapter 2

Paper capacity of the paper trays

Paper Tray

(Tray 1)

Multi-purpose Tray

(MP Tray)

Optional Lower Tray

(Tray 2)

Paper size

A4, Letter, Legal, B5,

Executive, A5,

A5 (Long Edge), A6, B6,

Folio

1

Width: 69.8 to 216 mm

Length: 116 to 406.4 mm

A4, Letter, Legal, B5,

Executive, A5, B6,

Folio

1

Paper types

Plain paper, Thin paper and Recycled paper

Plain paper, Thin paper,

Thick paper,

Thicker paper,

Bond paper,

Recycled paper,

Envelopes, Labels and

Glossy paper

Plain paper, Thin paper and Recycled paper

No. of sheets

up to 250 [80 g/m

2

]

50 sheets [80 g/m

2

]

3 Envelopes

1 Glossy paper up to 500 [80 g/m

2

]

1

Folio size is 8.5 in.

× 13 in. (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)

Recommended paper specifications

The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.

Basis weight

Thickness

Roughness

Stiffness

Grain direction

Volume resistivity

Surface resistivity

Filler

Ash content

Brightness

Opacity

75-90 g/m

2

80-110 μm

Higher than 20 sec.

90-150 cm

3

/100

Long grain

10e

9

-10e

11

ohm

10e

9

-10e

12

ohm-cm

CaCO

3

(Neutral)

Below 23 wt%

Higher than 80%

Higher than 85%

 Use paper made for plain paper copying.

 Use paper that is 75 to 90 g/m

2

.

 Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph value, and a moisture content of approx. 5%.

 This machine can use recycled paper that meets DIN 19309 specifications.

2

2

22

Handling and using special paper

2

The machine is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper.

However, some paper variables may have an effect on print quality or handling reliability.

Always test samples of paper before purchasing to ensure desirable performance.

Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct sunlight and heat.

Some important guidelines when selecting paper are:

 DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.

 Preprinted paper must use ink that can withstand the temperature of the machine’s fusing process 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit).

 If you use bond paper, paper having a rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit degraded performance.

When you are using glossy paper, put only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.

Loading paper

Types of paper to avoid

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.

DO NOT use paper:

• that is highly textured

• that is extremely smooth or shiny

• that is curled or warped

1

2

2

1

1 A curl of 2 mm or greater may cause jams to occur.

• that is coated or has a chemical finish

• that is damaged, creased or folded

• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide

• with tabs and staples

• with letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography

• that is multipart or carbonless

• that is designed for inkjet printing

If you use any of the types of paper listed, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.

23

Chapter 2

Envelopes

Most envelopes designed for laser printers will be suitable for your machine. However, some envelopes may have feed and printquality problems because of the way they have been made. A suitable envelope should have edges with straight, well-creased folds and the leading edge should not be thicker than two sheets of paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be of baggy or flimsy construction. You should buy quality envelopes from a supplier who understands that you will be using the envelopes in a laser machine.

We recommend that you print a test envelope to make sure the print results are what you want.

2

Types of envelopes to avoid

IMPORTANT

DO NOT use envelopes:

• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape

• that are extremely shiny or textured

• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie strings

• with self-adhesive closures

• that are of a baggy construction

• that are not sharply creased

• that are embossed (have raised writing on them)

• that were previously printed by a laser machine

• that are pre-printed on the inside

• that cannot be arranged neatly when stacked

• that are made of paper that weighs more than the paper weight specifications for the machine

• with edges that are not straight or consistently square

2

• with windows, holes, cut-outs or perforations

• with glue on surface as shown in figure below

• with double flaps as shown in figure below

• with sealing flaps that are not folded down when purchased

• with sealing flaps as shown in figure below

• with each side folded as shown in figure below

If you use any of the types of envelopes listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage may not be covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.

24

Labels

The machine will print on most types of labels designed for use with a laser machine. Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based since this material is more stable at the high temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the machine, because the label stock may stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause jams and print quality problems. No adhesive should be exposed between the labels.

Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire length and width of the sheet. Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jams or print problems.

All labels used in this machine must be able to withstand a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit) for a period of 0.1 seconds.

2

Types of labels to avoid

Do not use labels that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or an unusual shape.

2

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT feed part used label sheets. The exposed carrier sheet will damage your machine.

• Label sheets should not exceed the paper weight specifications described in this

User’s Guide. Labels exceeding this specification may not feed or print correctly and may cause damage to your machine.

• DO NOT reuse or insert labels that have previously been used or are missing a few labels on the sheet.

Loading paper

2

25

26

3

Loading documents

How to load documents

You can send a fax, make copies, and scan from the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) and the scanner glass.

3

Using the automatic document feeder (ADF)

The ADF can hold up to 50 pages and feeds each sheet individually. Use standard

80 g/m

2

paper and always fan the pages before putting them in the ADF.

3

Document Sizes Supported

3

Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm

Width:

Weight:

147.3 to 215.9 mm

64 to 90 g/m

2

How to load documents

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.

• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paperclipped, pasted or taped.

• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or fabric.

• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.

3

Note

• To scan documents that are not suitable

for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass on page 27.

• It is easier to use the ADF if you are loading a multiple page document.

• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written with ink are completely dry.

a

Unfold the ADF document support (1).

Lift up and unfold the ADF document output support flap (2).

1

2 b

Fan the pages well.

c

Place your document face up top edge

first in the ADF until the LCD display message changes and you feel it touch the feed rollers.

d

Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the width of your document.

1

3

Note

• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.

• To scan non-standard documents, see

Using the scanner glass on page 27.

Using the scanner glass

3

You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or scan pages of a book one page at a time.

Document Sizes Supported

3

Length: Up to 355.6 mm

Width: Up to 215.9 mm

Weight: Up to 2.0 kg

How to load documents

Note

To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.

a

Lift the document cover.

3

Loading documents b

Using the document guidelines on the left and top, place the document face

down in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

3

c

Close the document cover.

IMPORTANT

If the document is a book or is thick, do not slam or press on the cover.

27

4

Sending a fax

How to send a fax

The following steps show how to send a fax.

a

When you want to send a fax, or change fax send or receive settings, press the

(FAX) key to illuminate it in blue.

4

FAX

The LCD shows:

Duplex Fax

Address Book

Off

Fax

Resolution

Standard b

Do one of the following to load your document:

 Place the document face up in the

ADF. (See Using the automatic

document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)

 Load your document face down on

the scanner glass. (See Using the

scanner glass on page 27.)

Note

To send colour faxes with multiple pages use the ADF.

c

Set the scanner glass size, fax resolution or contrast if you want to change them.

Note

For more advanced fax sending operations and settings, see Sending a

fax in Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's

Guide:

• Broadcasting

• Duplex Fax (2-sided fax layout)

• Delayed Fax

• Batch TX

• Real Time TX

• Polled TX

• Overseas Mode

• Fax Resolution

• Contrast

• Glass ScanSize

• Coverpage Setup

• Coverpage Note

• Set New Default

• Factory Reset d

Choose one of the options below:

 If you want to send a single-sided

document, go to step e.

 If you want to send a 2-sided document, you need to choose the duplex scanning format of your

2-sided document.

Press Duplex Fax and choose

DuplexScan :LongEdge

or

DuplexScan :ShortEdge

.

Note

You can send 2-sided documents from the

ADF.

28

4

e

Enter the fax number using the dial pad.

You can also enter the fax number on the LCD by pressing Address Book and Send a fax, or you can press an

One Touch key on the machine’s control

panel. (For details, see How to dial on page 42.)

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Faxing from the ADF

 The machine starts scanning the document.

Faxing from the scanner glass

If Real Time TX is On, the machine will send the document without asking if there are additional pages to scan.

 If you press Mono Start, the machine starts scanning the first page.

Do one of the following:

• To send a single page, press No

(or press Mono Start again). The machine starts sending the document.

• To send more than one page, press Yes and place the next page on the scanner glass. Press

Mono Start. The machine starts scanning the page. (Repeat this step for each additional page.)

 If you press Colour Start and

Yes (Color fax)

, the machine starts sending the document.

Note

To cancel, press Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents from the scanner glass

4

When faxing Letter/Legal/Folio size documents, you will need to set the scan glass size to Letter or Legal/Folio; otherwise, a portion of your faxes will be missing.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display

Glass ScanSize

.

Press Glass ScanSize.

c

Press Letter or Legal/Folio.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You can save the setting you use most often by setting it as the default. (See

Setting your changes as the new default in

Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide.)

4

29

Chapter 4

Colour fax transmission

Your machine can send a colour fax to machines that support this feature. Colour faxes cannot be stored in the machine's memory. When you send a colour fax, the machine will send it in real time (even if Real

Time TX is set to Off).

4

Cancelling a fax in progress

4

Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling or sending, the LCD will show

Cancel Job?

.

Press Yes to cancel the fax.

Transmission verification report

You can use the Transmission Verification

Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving party’s name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent, and whether or not the transmission was successful.

There are several settings available for the

Transmission Verification Report:

On

: Prints a report after every fax you send.

On+Image

: Prints a report after every fax you send. A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.

Off

: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

Off is the default setting.

Off+Image

: Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Report Setting

.

Press Report Setting.

d

Press XMIT Report.

e

Press On, On+Image, Off or

Off+Image

.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

4

30

Note

• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image, the image will only appear on the

Transmission Verification Report if Real

Time Transmission is set to Off. (See

Real Time Transmission in Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide.)

• If your transmission is successful, OK will appear next to RESULT on the

Transmission Verification Report.

If transmission is not successful, ERROR will appear next to RESULT.

Sending a fax

4

31

32

5

Receiving a fax

Receive modes

You must choose a receive mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your line.

5

Choosing the receive mode

By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagrams below will help you choose the correct mode. (For more detailed information about the receive

modes, see Using receive modes on page 33.)

Do you want to use the telephone features of your machine (if available) or an external telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as the machine?

Yes

Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering device?

No

No

Fax Only

Manual

No

Fax/Tel

Yes

External TAD

Yes

To set the receive mode follow the instructions below.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Initial Setup.

Press Initial Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Receive Mode.

Press Receive Mode.

d

Press Fax Only, Fax/Tel, External TAD or Manual.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

The LCD will display the current receive mode.

5

5

Using receive modes

Some receive modes answer automatically

(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to change the Ring Delay before using these

modes. (See Ring Delay on page 34.)

5

Fax Only

Fax Only

mode will automatically answer every call as a fax.

5

Fax/Tel

Fax/Tel

mode helps you automatically manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and dealing with them in one of the following ways:

 Faxes will be automatically received.

 Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast double-ring made by your machine.

(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only) on page 34 and Ring Delay on page 34.)

5

Receiving a fax

Manual

Manual

mode turns off all automatic answering functions unless you are using the

BT Call Sign

1

feature.

1

BT Call Sign is for U.K. only.

To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the handset of the external telephone. When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press

Mono Start or Colour Start, and choose

Receive

to receive the fax. You can also use the Fax Detect feature to receive faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as the machine.

(Also see Fax Detect on page 35.)

5

External TAD

External TAD

mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls. Incoming calls will be dealt with in the following ways:

 Faxes will be automatically received.

 Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.

(For more information see Connecting an

external TAD on page 37.)

5

5

33

Chapter 5

Receive Mode settings

5

Ring Delay

The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in

Fax Only

and Fax/Tel modes.

If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the

maximum number of rings. (See Operation

from external or extension telephones

on page 39 and Fax Detect on page 35.)

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Ring Delay.

Press Ring Delay.

e

Press the button on the LCD to choose how many times the line rings before the machine answers.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

5

F/T Ring Time

(Fax/Tel mode only)

When somebody calls your machine, you and your caller will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring

Delay setting.

If the call is a fax, then your machine will receive it; however, if it is a voice call the machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast double-ring) for the time you have set in the

F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring it means that you have a voice caller on the line.

Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can still answer the call on any telephone. (For more information see

Using Remote Codes on page 41.)

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

F/T Ring Time

.

Press F/T Ring Time.

e

Press how long the machine will ring to alert you that you have a voice call (20,

30, 40 or 70 seconds).

f

Press Stop/Exit.

5

34

Fax Detect

If Fax Detect is On:

The machine can receive a fax automatically, even if you answer the call. When you see

Receiving

on the LCD or hear a click on the phone line through the handset you are using, just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.

5

If Fax Detect is Off:

If you are at the machine and answer a fax call first by lifting the external handset, then press Mono Start or Colour Start, and then press Receive to receive the Fax.

If you answered at an extension telephone

press l51. (See Operation from external or

extension telephones on page 39.)

5

Note

• If this feature is set to On, but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension telephone handset, press the fax receive code l51.

• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set Fax Detect to Off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Fax Detect.

Press Fax Detect.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

5

Receiving a fax

5

35

36

6

Telephone and external devices

6

Telephone line services

Setting the telephone line type

If you are connecting the machine to a line that features a PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, it is necessary to change the

Telephone Line Type accordingly by completing the following steps. If you are using a line that features a PBX, you can set your machine so that it always accesses the outside line (using the prefix you entered), or accesses the outside line when Tel/R is pressed.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Initial Setup

.

Press Initial Setup.

c

Press a or b to display

Phone Line Set

.

Press Phone Line Set.

d

Press PBX, ISDN (or Normal).

e

Do one of the following:

 If you chose ISDN or Normal, go to

step i.

If you chose PBX, go to step f.

f

Press On or Always.

Note

• If you choose On, pressing Tel/R will let you access an outside line.

• If you choose Always, you can access an outside line without pressing Tel/R.

6

6

g

Do one of the following:

 If you want to change the current prefix number, press Dial Prefix

and go to step h.

 If you do not want to change the

current prefix number, go to step i.

h

Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits) on the dial pad.

Press OK.

Note

You can use the numbers and symbols 0 to 9, #, l and !. (You cannot use ! with any other numbers and symbols.) i

Press Stop/Exit.

PBX and TRANSFER

The machine is initially set to Normal, which lets the machine connect to a standard PSTN

(Public Switched Telephone Network) line.

However, many offices use a central telephone system or Private Branch

Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine’s recall feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most

PBX systems allowing you to gain access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. The feature works when Tel/R is pressed.

6

Connecting an external

TAD

6

You can connect an external Telephone

Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.

If it hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice message and the display will show Telephone.

The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).

This is because your machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.

Telephone and external devices

Connections

The external TAD must be connected as shown in the illustration below.

1

6

1

(Example for U.K.)

1 TAD

a

Set your external TAD to one or two rings. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.) b

Record the outgoing message on your external TAD.

c

Set the TAD to answer calls.

d

Set the Receive Mode to

External TAD

. (See Choosing the

receive mode on page 32.)

6

Note

If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the ring delay setting on your external TAD.

37

Chapter 6

Recording an outgoing message (OGM)

a

Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax tones.

b

Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

c

End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation code for people sending manual faxes. For example:

“After the beep, leave a message or press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Note

• You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Fax Activation

Code l51. (See Using Remote Codes on page 41.)

• We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5 second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.

6

Multi-line connections (PBX)

6

We suggest you ask the company who installed your PBX to connect your machine.

If you have a multi line system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the machine being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls will be answered by a switchboard operator we recommend that you set the Receive Mode to Manual.

We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate properly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company who handles your PBX.

38

External and extension telephones

Note

You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Remote Activation

Code l51 and Remote Deactivation Code

#51. (See Using Remote Codes on page 41.)

Connecting an external or extension telephone

6

You can connect a separate telephone directly to your machine as shown in the diagram below.

1

2

(Example for U.K.)

1 Extension telephone

2 External telephone

When you are using an external telephone, the LCD shows Telephone.

Operation from external or extension telephones

If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, or an external telephone that is correctly connected to the machine through the T-piece connection, you can make your machine take the call by using the Remote

Activation code. When you press the Remote

Activation code l51 the machine starts to receive the fax.

6

6

Telephone and external devices

If you answer a call and no one is on the line:

6

You should assume that you’re receiving a manual fax.

Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the

LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.

Note

You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your tactically take the call. (See

Fax Detect on page 35.)

For Fax/Tel mode only

6

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring Time (fast double-ringing) to alert you to pick up a voice call.

Lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press Tel/R to answer.

If you are at an extension telephone, you will need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring

Time and then press #51 between the fast double-ringings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing l51.

Using extension telephones

(U.K. only)

6

Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones (those connected to sockets in other rooms in the building), or perhaps you intend to add extension telephones to your line. While the simplest arrangement is a parallel connection, there are some reasons why this arrangement may cause problems.

The most common problem, is someone picking up an extension telephone while the machine is trying to send a fax.

6

39

Chapter 6

Such problems can easily be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine, in a master/slave configuration (see figure 2). In such a configuration, this machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use, so it will not attempt to seize the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection”.

The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 1, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in figure 2.

This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon

Hull Telecommunications, your PBX maintainer or a qualified telephone installation company as appropriate. Simply explained, the extension telephone circuit should be terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should be inserted into the modular socket of the white

“T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly.

Figure 1:

1 1 2

3

6

Figure 2: Recommended connection of extension sockets

1 1 2

3

6

FAX

(Example for U.K.)

1 Extension socket

2 Master socket

3 Incoming line

These phones are now connected as external

devices as shown on page 39, because they

are connected to the fax machine via the

T-connector.

Using a non-Brother cordless external handset

6

If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord (see

page 39) and you typically carry the cordless

handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.

If you let the machine answer first, you will have to go to the machine so you can press

Tel/R to transfer the call to the cordless handset.

1 Extension socket

2 Master socket

3 Incoming line

FAX

(Example for U.K.)

40

Using Remote Codes

Remote Activation Code

If you answer a fax call on an external or extension telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Remote

Activation Code l51. Wait for the chirping

sounds then replace the handset. (See Fax

Detect on page 35.) Your caller will have to

press start to send the fax.

6

If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Remote Deactivation Code

If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T (fast double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51

(make sure you press this between the rings).

If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone by pressing Tel/R.

6

Turning on the Remote Codes

You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to on to use the Fax Receive Code and

Telephone Answer Code.

6

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Remote Codes.

Press Remote Codes.

e

Press On.

6

Telephone and external devices f

If you do not want to change the Remote

Activation Code, press on the LCD.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

Changing the Remote Codes

The preset Remote Activation Code is l51.

The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51.

If you are always disconnected when accessing your External TAD, try changing the three-digit remote codes, for example ### and 555.

6

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Remote Codes.

Press Remote Codes.

e

Press On or Off.

f

If you chose On in step e, enter the new

Remote Activation Code.

Press OK.

g

Enter the new Remote Deactivation

Code.

Press OK.

h

Press Stop/Exit.

6

41

42

7

Dialling and storing numbers

How to dial

You can dial in any of the following ways.

7

Manual dialling

Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the telephone or fax number.

7

Speed dialling

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press the three-digit number you want to call. You can also display the numbers in alphabetical order by pressing on the Touchscreen.

c

Press Send a fax or

Send a E-mail

.

d

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Note

If the LCD shows Not Registered when you enter or search a Speed Dial number, a number has not been stored at this location.

7

One Touch dialling

Press the One Touch key that stores the

number you want to call. (See Storing

One Touch Dial numbers on page 46.)

7

7

To dial One Touch numbers 21 to 40, hold down 21-40 as you press the One Touch key.

Search

You can search alphabetically for names you have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial

memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial

numbers on page 46 and Storing Speed Dial

numbers on page 48.)

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press on the Touchscreen.

c

Press the first few letters of the name on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

d

Press a or b to scroll until you find the name you are looking for.

Press the name you are looking for.

e

Press Send a fax or

Send a E-mail

.

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Note

• If the LCD shows

Results cannot be found.

when you enter the first few letters of the name, it means that a name for the letter is not stored.

• One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial numbers stored without the name cannot be retrieved by the search function.

LDAP search

7

If the machine is connected to your LDAP server, you can search for information such as fax numbers and E-mail addresses from your server. (For details about how to set up

LDAP see the Network User's Guide.)

7

Dialling and storing numbers

Fax redial

If you are sending a fax automatically and the line is busy, the machine will automatically redial up to three times at five minute intervals.

If you are sending a fax manually and the line is busy, press Redial/Pause and try it again.

You can call the last number dialled, by pressing Redial/Pause.

Redial/Pause only works if you dialled from the control panel.

7

7

43

Chapter 7

Storing numbers

You can set up your machine to do the following types of easy dialling: One Touch,

Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting faxes. You can also specify the default resolution for each One Touch and Speed

Dial number. When you dial a quick dial number, the LCD shows the name, if you stored it, or the number. A scan profile can also be stored along with the fax number.

If you lose electrical power, the quick dial numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.

A scan profile is the resolution and other scan settings that you choose when you store a number.

7

Storing a pause

Press Pause to insert a 2.8-second pause between numbers. You can press Pause as many times as needed to increase the length of the pause.

7

44

Dialling and storing numbers

One Touch and Speed Dial Storage Options

The following chart shows the selections for the settings for One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.

When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following steps.

7

Step 1

Enter Name

Enter the name you want to store or

Press OK

Step 2

Select Registration

Type

Fax

IFAX

E-Mail Color PDF

E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS

E-Mail Gray PDF

E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

E-Mail B&W PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF

Step 3

Enter Number or

E-mail Address

Enter the Fax

Number

Enter the E-mail

Address

Step 4

Select Resolution

Standard

S.Fine

Standard

Photo

200 dpi

,

, Fine,

, Photo

100 dpi

300 dpi

, Fine,

, 200 dpi,

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

-

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

200 dpi

,

200 x 100 dpi

200 x 100 dpi

-

-

-

-

Step 5

Select File type

-

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

-

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

Note

• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine using Web Based

Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in

Web Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.

• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.

• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including a digital certificate within the document.

7

45

Chapter 7

Storing One Touch Dial numbers

Your machine has 20 One Touch keys where you can store 40 fax or telephone numbers or

E-mail addresses for automatic dialling. To access numbers 21 to 40, hold down 21-40 as you press the One Touch key.

7

a

Press the One Touch key where you want to store the number or E-mail address.

If a number or E-mail address is not stored there, the LCD shows

Not Registered

Register Now?

.

Press Yes.

Or, you can use the LCD buttons by pressing Address Book, More and

Set One Touch Dial

, and then enter the number of the One Touch key where you want to store the number or

E-mail address and press OK.

Note

If the One Touch number you choose is already taken, the OK button on the LCD will not work. Choose a different number.

b

Do one of the following:

 Enter the name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen. Use the chart on

Entering text on page 183 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

 Press OK to store the number or

E-mail address without a name.

c

Press d or c to select

Fax

,

IFAX

,

E-Mail B&W PDF

,

E-Mail B&W TIFF

,

E-Mail Color PDF

,

E-Mail Color JPEG

,

E-Mail Color XPS

,

E-Mail Gray PDF

,

E-Mail Gray JPEG

or

E-Mail Gray XPS

.

d

Enter the telephone, fax number (up to

20 characters each) or E-mail address

(up to 60 characters each). Use the

chart on Entering text on page 183 to

help you enter letters.

Press OK.

Note

• If you selected an E-mail Registration

Type in step c and save the E-mail

address, you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Scan mode.

• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type

in step c and save the E-mail address,

you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Fax mode.

46

e

To save a fax/scan resolution along with the number/E-mail address, go to the appropriate step as shown in the following table.

Option selected in step c

Fax

IFAX

E-Mail Color PDF

E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS

E-Mail Gray PDF

E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

E-Mail B&W PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF

Go to step

f g h i j

Note

• When you do a broadcast and you have saved a scan profile along with the number or E-mail address, the scan profile of the One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number you chose first will be applied to the broadcast.

• For details about the file format, see Using

the Scan key in the Software User's

Guide.

f

Select the resolution from Standard,

Fine

, S.Fine or Photo and go to

step l.

g

Select the resolution from Standard,

Fine

or Photo and go to step l.

h

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,

go to step k.

 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to

step l.

Dialling and storing numbers i

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

or 300 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go

to step k.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or

E-Mail Gray XPS

, go to step l.

j

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or

200 x 100 dpi

.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go

to step k.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go

to step l.

k

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

or Signed PDF that will be used to send to your PC.

Note

If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a fou-digit password using numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.

l

When the LCD displays your settings, press OK to confirm.

m

Press Stop/Exit.

7

47

Chapter 7

Storing Speed Dial numbers

7

You can store your frequently used numbers as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial you will only have to press a few keys (for example: press Address Book, the number you want to call and Send a fax). The machine can store 300 Speed Dial numbers

(001-300).

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Press Set Speed Dial.

d

Do one of the following:

 Enter the name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen. Use the chart on

Entering text on page 183 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

 Press OK to store the number or

E-mail address without a name.

e

Press d or c to select

Fax

,

IFAX

,

E-Mail B&W PDF

,

E-Mail B&W TIFF

,

E-Mail Color PDF

,

E-Mail Color JPEG

,

E-Mail Color XPS

,

E-Mail Gray PDF

,

E-Mail Gray JPEG

or

E-Mail Gray XPS

.

f

Enter the fax/telephone number (up to

20 characters each) or E-mail address

(up to 60 characters each). Use the

chart on Entering text on page 183 to

help you enter letters.

Press OK.

Note

• If you selected an E-mail Registration

Type in step e and save the E-mail

address, you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Scan mode.

• If you selected the IFAX Registration Type

in step e and save the E-mail address,

you can only use the E-mail address when you are in Fax mode.

g

To save a fax/scan resolution along with the number/E-mail address, go to the appropriate step as shown in the following table.

Option selected in step e

Fax

IFAX

E-Mail Color PDF

E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS

E-Mail Gray PDF

E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

E-Mail B&W PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF

Go to step

h i

j k l

Note

• When you do a broadcast and you have saved a scan profile along with the number or E-mail address, the scan profile of the One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number you chose first will be applied to the broadcast.

• For details about the file format, see the

Software User's Guide.

h

Select the resolution from Standard,

Fine

, S.Fine or Photo and go to

step n.

i

Select the resolution from Standard,

Fine

or Photo and go to step n.

48

j

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,

go to step m.

 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to

step n.

k

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

or 300 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go

to step m.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or

E-Mail Gray XPS

, go to step n.

l

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or

200 x 100 dpi

.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go

to step m.

If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go

to step n.

m

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

or Signed PDF that will be used to send to your PC.

Note

If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a four-digit password using numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.

n

Enter a three-digit Speed Dial location number (001-300).

Press OK.

o

When the LCD displays your settings, press OK to confirm.

p

Press Stop/Exit.

Dialling and storing numbers

Changing or Deleting One

Touch and Speed Dial numbers

You can change or delete a One Touch or

Speed Dial number that has already been stored.

If the stored number has a scheduled job, such as a delayed fax or a fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the LCD. You cannot select the number to make changes or to delete it unless you first cancel the scheduled job. (See Checking and canceling

waiting jobs in chapter 3 of the Advanced

User's Guide.) a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Do one of the following:

 Press Change to edit the name, number or E-mail address and go to

step d.

Press Delete to delete all information in a Speed Dial or One

Touch number.

Select the number you want to delete by pressing it to display a red check mark.

Press OK.

When Erase This Data? appears, press Yes to accept it.

Go to step h.

d

Press a or b to display the number you want to change.

Press the number you want to change.

Note

One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.

Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

7

7

49

Chapter 7 e

Press Name:

Number/Address:

Resolution:

or

PDF Type: f

Do one of the following:

 If you chose Name:, enter the name

(up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

 If you chose Number/Address:, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) or E-mail address (up to 60 digits) by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

 If you chose Resolution:, press one of the available resolution options displayed on the

Touchscreen.

 If you chose PDF Type:, press one of the available file type options displayed on the Touchscreen.

Note

How to change the stored name or number:

If you want to change a character, press d or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.

The LCD will display your new setting.

g

Do one of the following:

 To finish changing, press OK.

 To change more details, go to

step f.

h

Press Stop/Exit.

Tone or Pulse

If you have a Pulse dialling service, but need to send Tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow the instructions below. If you have Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send tone signals.

a

Lift the handset of the external telephone.

b

Press # on the machine’s control panel.

Any digits dialled after this will send tone signals.

When you hang up, the machine will return to the Pulse dialling service.

7

50

8

Making copies

8

How to copy

The following steps show the basic copy operation. For details about each option, see the Advanced User's Guide.

a

When you want to make a copy, press

(COPY) to illuminate it in blue.

 Make sure you are in Copy mode.

Copy

 The LCD shows:

Quality

Auto

Enlarge/

Reduce

100%

Favorite

Duplex Copy

Off

You can enter the number of copies you want by pressing the + and - buttons on the Touchscreen.

Note

The default setting is Fax mode. You can change the amount of time that the machine stays in Copy mode after the last copy operation. (See Mode Timer in

Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide.) b

Do one of the following to load your document:

Place the document face up in the

ADF. (See Using the automatic

document feeder (ADF) on page 26.)

 Load your document face down on

the scanner glass. (See Using the

scanner glass on page 27.)

8

c

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Note

If the LCD shows Please Wait and the machine stops copying while you are making multiple copies, please wait for 30 to 40 seconds until the machine finishes the colour registrations and cleaning process of the belt unit.

Stop copying

8

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Copy settings

Press COPY and then press d or c to choose the setting you want. For details about changing the copy settings, see Copy

settings in Chapter 7 of the Advanced User's

Guide.

You can change the following copy settings:

Quality

Enlarge/Reduce

Duplex Copy

Tray Use

Brightness

Contrast

Stack / Sort

Page Layout

2in1(ID)

Color Adjust

(Saturation)

Set New Default

Factory Reset

Favorite Settings

Favorite

8

8

51

52

9

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage

9

With the Direct Print feature, you do not need a computer to print data. You can print by just plugging your USB Flash memory drive into the machine’s USB direct interface. You can also connect and print directly from a camera set to USB mass storage mode.

Note

• Some USB Flash memory drives may not work with the machine.

• If your camera is in PictBridge mode, you cannot print data. Please refer to the documentation supplied with your camera to switch from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.

Creating a PRN or

PostScript

®

3™ file for direct printing

9

Note

The screens in this section may vary depending on your application and operating system.

a

From the menu bar of an application, click File, then Print.

b

Choose Brother MFC-XXXX Printer (1) and check the Print to file box (2).

Click Print.

1

2 c

Choose the folder you want to save the file to and enter the file name if you are prompted to.

If you are prompted for a file name only, you can also specify the folder you want to save the file in by entering the directory name. For example:

C:\Temp\FileName.prn

If you have a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB Flash memory drive.

Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage

9

a

Connect your USB Flash memory drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface (1) on the front of the machine.

Press Direct Print. Your machine will enter Direct Print Mode.

1

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive or digital camera supporting mass storage

1

Note

• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.

• If your machine has been set to Secure

Function Lock On, you may not be able to access Direct Print. (For explanations about error messages that may occur, see

Switching Users in chapter 2 of the

Advanced User's Guide.) b

Press a or b to choose the folder name and file name you want to print.

If you have chosen the folder name, press a or b to choose the file name you want to print.

Note

• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.

• If you want to print an index of the files, press Index Print on the

Touchscreen. Press Mono Start or

Colour Start to print the data.

• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the LCD does not show any information even if you connect a USB flash memory drive to the USB direct interface. Press the Touchscreen or any key to wake up the machine. Press

Direct Print

on the Touchscreen, the

LCD will show the Direct Print menu.

c

Choose the number of copies you want by pressing the + and - buttons on the

Touchscreen.

d

Do one of the following:

 Press Print Settings. Go to

step e.

 If you do not need to change the current default settings, go to

step g.

9

53

Chapter 9 e

Press a or b to display an option setting you need to change.

Press the option and change the setting.

Note

• You can choose the following settings:

Paper Size

Paper Type

Multiple Page

Orientation

Duplex

Collate

Tray Use

Print Quality

PDF Option

• Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.

f

Do one of the following:

 If you want to change other option

settings, repeat step e.

 If you do not want to change any other options, press

step g.

and go to g

Press Mono Start or Colour Start to print the data.

IMPORTANT

• To prevent damage to your machine, DO

NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB Flash memory drive to the USB direct interface.

• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine has finished printing.

Changing the default settings for direct print

9

You can change the default settings for Direct

Print.

a

Connect your USB Flash memory drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface on the front of the machine.

b

Press Direct Print on the LCD.

c

Press Default Settings.

d

Press a or b to display the setting you want to change.

Press the setting.

e

Press the new option you want. Repeat

steps d to e for each setting you want

to change.

Note

How to display all available options:

When the LCD displays the d and c buttons, press d or c to display all available options.

54

10

How to print from a computer

Printing a document

The machine can receive data from your computer and print it. To print from a computer, install the printer driver. (See

Printing for Windows

®

or Printing and Faxing for Macintosh in the Software User's Guide for the details about the print settings.) a

Install the Brother printer driver on the

Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick

Setup Guide.) b

From your application, choose the Print command.

c

Choose the name of your machine in the

Print dialog box and click Properties.

d

Choose the settings you want in the

Properties dialog box.

Paper Size

Orientation

Copies

Media Type

Print Quality

Colour / Mono

Multiple Page

Duplex / Booklet

Paper Source

Click OK.

e

Click OK to begin printing.

10

10

10

55

56

11

How to scan to a computer

Scanning a document

11

There are several ways to scan documents.

You can use the (SCAN) key on the machine or the scanner drivers on your computer.

a

To use the machine as a scanner, install a scanner driver. If the machine is on a

Network, configure it with a TCP/IP address.

 Install the scanner drivers on the

Installation CD-ROM. (See the Quick

Setup Guide and Scanning in the

Software User's Guide.)

 Configure the machine with a TCP/IP address if network scanning does not work. (See Configuring Network

Scanning in the Software User's

Guide.) b

Load your document. (See How to load

documents on page 26.)

 Use the ADF to scan multiple pages of documents. The ADF feeds each sheet automatically.

 Use the scanner glass to scan a page of a book or one sheet at a time.

c

Do one of the following:

 To scan using the (SCAN)

key, go to Scanning using the scan

key on page 56.

 To scan using a scanner driver at

your computer, go to Scanning using

a scanner driver on page 57.

Scanning using the scan key

For more information, see Using the Scan

key in the Software User's Guide.

a

Press the (SCAN) key.

b

Choose the scan mode you want.

Scan to:

USB

Network

FTP

E-mail

(Server)

E-mail

Image

OCR

1

File

1

(Macintosh users)

Presto! PageManager must be downloaded

and installed before use. See Accessing

Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for

further instructions.

c

(For network users)

Choose the computer you want to send the data to.

d

Press Mono Start or Colour Start to begin scanning.

11

11

Scanning using a scanner driver

For more information, see Scanning a

document using the TWAIN driver, Scanning

a document using the WIA driver or Scanning

a document using the ICA driver in the

Software User's Guide.

a

Start a scanning application and click the Scan button.

b

Adjust the settings such as Resolution,

Brightness, and Scan Type in the

Scanner Setup dialog box.

c

Click Start or Scan to begin scanning.

11

How to scan to a computer

11

57

58

A

Routine maintenance

Replacing the consumable items

The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops printing.

A

Toner cartridge

See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.

Model Name: TN-320BK, TN-325BK, TN-328BK,

TN-320C, TN-325C, TN-328C, TN-320M, TN-325M,

TN-328M, TN-320Y, TN-325Y, TN-328Y,

Drum unit

See Replacing the drum unit on page 68.

Model Name: DR-320CL

A

Belt unit

See Replacing the belt unit on page 74.

Model Name: BU-300CL

Waste toner box

See Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.

Model Name: WT-300CL

Routine maintenance

LCD messages

Toner Low

Prepare New

Toner

Cartridge.X

Consumable item to replace

Toner cartridge

X = Black, Cyan,

Magenta, Yellow

Approximate life How to replace

<Black>

2,500 pages

1 2 3

4,000 pages

1 2 4

6,000 pages

1 2 5

<Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow>

1,500 pages

1 2 3

3,500 pages

1 2 4

6,000 pages

1 2 5

See page 62.

Replace Parts

WT Box End Soon

Waste toner box

50,000 pages

1

3

4

1

2

5

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Standard toner cartridge

High capacity toner cartridge

Super high capacity toner cartridge

See page 80.

Model name

TN-320BK

TN-325BK

TN-325C

3

,

4

,

TN-328BK

TN-320C

5

,

3

,

4

,

TN-328C

TN-320M

5

,

3

,

TN-325M

TN-328M

TN-320Y

TN-325Y

TN-328Y

3

,

4

,

5

4

,

5

,

WT-300CL

A

59

You will need to clean the machine regularly and replace the consumable items when the following messages are displayed on the LCD.

LCD messages Consumable item to replace

Replace TonerX

Toner cartridge

X = Black, Cyan,

Magenta, Yellow

Approximate life How to replace

<Black>

2,500 pages

1 2 5

4,000 pages

1 2 6

6,000 pages

1 2 7

<Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow>

1,500 pages

1 2 5

3,500 pages

1 2 6

6,000 pages

1 2 7

See page 62.

Model name

Replace Parts

Drum Unit

Drum unit

Drum Stop

Replace Parts

Belt Unit

Belt unit

Replace WT Box

Waste toner box

Replace Parts

Fuser Unit

Fuser unit

Replace Parts

Laser Unit

Laser unit

Replace Parts

PF Kit 1

Paper feeding kit 1

Replace Parts

PF Kit 2

Paper feeding kit 2

Replace Parts

PF Kit MP

Paper feeding kit

MP

25,000 pages

1 3 4

50,000 pages

1

50,000 pages

1

100,000 pages

1

100,000 pages

1

100,000 pages

1

100,000 pages

1

50,000 pages

1

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

1 page per job.

Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

Standard toner cartridge

High capacity toner cartridge

Super high capacity toner cartridge

See page 69.

See page 74.

BU-300CL

See page 80.

WT-300CL

Call your Brother dealer for a replacement fuser unit.

Call your Brother dealer for a replacement laser unit.

Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit 1.

Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit 2.

Call your Brother dealer for a replacement paper feeding kit MP.

TN-320BK

TN-325BK

5

,

6

,

TN-328BK

TN-320C

5

,

7

,

TN-325C

TN-328C

TN-320M

TN-325M

TN-328M

TN-320Y

7

,

5

,

6

,

7

,

5

,

6

,

TN-325Y

TN-328Y

6

,

7

DR-320CL

60

Routine maintenance

Note

• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

(See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)

• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally spilling or scattering the material inside.

• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.

• The projected life of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage and type of media used.

61

A

Replacing a Toner cartridge

A

Model Name: For the model name of toner

cartridges, see Replacing the consumable

items on page 58.

The Standard toner cartridges can print approximately 2,500 pages (black) or approximately 1,500 pages (cyan, magenta,

yellow)

1

. The High Yield toner cartridges can print approximately 4,000 pages (black) or approximately 3,500 pages (cyan, magenta,

yellow)

1

. The Super High Yield toner cartridges can print approximately 6,000

pages (black, cyan, magenta, yellow)

1

.

Actual page count will vary depending on your average type of document. When a toner cartridge is running low, the LCD shows

Toner Low

.

The toner cartridges that come supplied with the machine are standard toner cartridges.

1

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Note

• It is a good idea to keep a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the

Toner Low

warning.

• To ensure high quality printing, we recommend that you use only Brother

Original toner cartridges. When you want to buy toner cartridges, please call your

Brother dealer.

• We recommend that you clean the machine when you replace the toner

cartridge. See Cleaning and Checking the

machine on page 87.

• If you change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing, the amount of toner used will change.

• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until immediately before you put it into the machine.

Toner Low

If the LCD shows Toner Low

Prepare New Toner Cartridge.X

, buy a new toner cartridge and have it ready before you get a Replace Toner message.

The LCD shows the toner colour that is near the end of its life (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or

Black).

A

Replace Toner

When the LCD shows Replace Toner the machine will stop printing until you replace the toner cartridge. The message on the LCD will indicate which colour you need to replace.

A new or unused Brother Original toner cartridge will reset the Replace Toner mode.

A

62

Replacing the toner cartridges

a

Make sure that the machine is turned on.

A

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

63

A

d

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it toward the machine to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat, level, stable surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.

64

WARNING

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It could explode, resulting in injuries.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray or any type of flammable substance to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

See To use the product safely in the Safety

and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.

Note

• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge tightly in a suitable bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.

• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/ index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the

Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. (See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and

EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet)

Be careful not to inhale toner.

e

Push to release the latches of the corona wire cover (1), and then open the cover.

Routine maintenance f

Clean the corona wires inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tabs from left to right and right to left several times.

1

1

Note

Be sure to return the tab to the home position (a) (1). If you do not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.

A

65

g

Close the corona wire cover.

i

Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently shake it from side to side several times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

h

Repeat steps e to g to clean each of

three remaining corona wires.

IMPORTANT

• Unpack the toner cartridge just before you put it in the machine. If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.

• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct sunlight or room light, the unit may be damaged.

• Brother machines are designed to work with toner of a particular specification and will work to a level of optimum performance when used with Brother

Original toner cartridges. Brother cannot guarantee this optimum performance if toner or toner cartridges of other specifications are used. Brother does not therefore recommend the use of cartridges other than Brother Original cartridges with this machine, or the refilling of empty cartridges with toner from other sources. If damage is caused to the drum unit or other part of this machine as a result of the use of toner or toner cartridges other than Brother Original products due to the incompatibility or lack of suitability of those products with this machine, any repairs required as a result may not be covered by the warranty.

66

j

Pull off the protective cover.

IMPORTANT

Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit immediately after you have removed the protective cover. To prevent any degradation to the print quality, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

Routine maintenance k

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

C

M

Y

K

A

C - Cyan

Y - Yellow

M - Magenta

K - Black

67

l

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

m

Close the front cover of the machine.

Note

After you replace a toner cartridge, DO

NOT turn off the machine's power switch or open the front cover until the LCD clears the Please Wait message and returns to Ready mode.

Replacing the drum unit

Model name: DR-320CL

A new drum unit can print approximately

25,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

A

IMPORTANT

For best performance, use a Brother

Original drum unit and Brother Original toner units. Printing with a third-party drum unit or toner unit may reduce not only the print quality but also the quality and life of the machine itself. Warranty coverage may not apply to problems caused by the use of a third-party drum unit or toner unit.

Drum Error

The corona wires have become dirty. Clean the corona wires in the drum unit. (See

Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)

If you cleaned the corona wires and

Drum Error

was not cleared then the drum unit is at the end of its life. Replace the drum unit with a new one.

A

Replace Parts

Drum

The drum unit has exceeded its rated life.

Please replace the drum unit with a new one.

We recommend a Brother Original drum unit be installed at this time.

After replacement, reset the drum counter by following the instructions included with the new drum unit.

A

Drum Stop

We cannot guarantee the print quality. Please replace the drum unit with a new one. We recommend a Brother Original drum unit be installed at this time.

A

After replacement, reset the drum counter by following the instructions included with the new drum unit.

68

Replacing the drum unit

IMPORTANT

• While removing the drum unit, handle it carefully because it may contain toner. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

• Every time you replace the drum unit, clean the inside of the machine. (See

Cleaning and Checking the machine on page 87.)

A

a

Make sure that the machine is turned on.

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

A

69

d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

70

e

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

Routine maintenance

IMPORTANT

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

WARNING

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It could explode, resulting in injuries.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray, or any type of flammable substance to clean the outside or inside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

See To use the product safely in the Safety

and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

Note

• Be sure to seal up the used drum unit tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the unit.

• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/ index.html for instructions on how to return your used consumable items to the

Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. (See EU Directive 2002/96/EC and

EN 50419 in the Safety and Legal Booklet)

A

71

f

Unpack the new drum unit and remove the protective cover.

g

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the new drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

IMPORTANT

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

Y

K

C

M

C - Cyan

Y - Yellow

M - Magenta

K - Black

• Unpack the drum unit just before you put it in the machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or room light may damage the drum unit.

72

h

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

Routine maintenance j

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

1

k

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

i

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

1

2

A

l

Close the front cover of the machine.

73

Resetting the drum counter

When you replace a drum unit with a new one, you will need to reset the drum counter by completing the following steps:

A

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Machine Info.

.

Press Machine Info..

c

Press Reset Menu.

d

Press Drum.

e

The machine will display

Reset Drum?

.

f

Press Yes, and then press Stop/Exit.

Replacing the belt unit

Model name: BU-300CL

A new belt unit can print approximately

50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

A

Replace Parts

Belt Unit

When the Replace Parts Belt Unit message appears on the LCD, you will need to replace the belt unit:

A

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.

If you touch it, it could degrade print quality.

• Damage caused by incorrect handling of the belt unit may void your warranty.

a

Make sure that the machine is turned on.

74

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

75

A

d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

76

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

Routine maintenance e

Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

IMPORTANT

To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.

A

f

Unpack the new belt unit.

77

g

Put the new belt unit back in the machine. Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.

h

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

1

i

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

1

2

78

j

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

k

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Routine maintenance

Resetting the belt unit counter

When you replace a belt unit with a new one, you will need to reset the belt unit counter by completing the following steps:

A

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Machine Info.

.

Press Machine Info..

c

Press Reset Menu.

d

Press Belt Unit.

e

The machine will display Reset Belt

Unit?

.

f

Press Yes, and then press Stop/Exit.

A

l

Close the front cover of the machine.

79

Replacing the waste toner box

A

Model name: WT-300CL

A new waste toner box can print approximately 50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Replace Parts

WT Box End Soon

If the LCD shows Replace Parts

WT Box End Soon

, it means the waste toner box is near the end of its life. Buy a new waste toner box and have it ready before you get a Replace WT Box message.

A

Replace WT Box

When the Replace WT Box message appears on the LCD, you will need to replace the waste toner box:

A

WARNING

DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.

It could explode.

Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.

a

Make sure that the machine is turned on.

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

80

c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

Routine maintenance d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

81

A

82

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

e

Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

Routine maintenance f

Remove the two pieces of orange packing material and discard them.

IMPORTANT

To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.

Note

This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and are not required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to protect your machine during shipment.

A

83

g

Hold the green handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.

h

Unpack the new waste toner box and put the new waste toner box in the machine using the green handle. Make sure the waste toner box is level and fits firmly into place.

84

CAUTION

Handle the waste toner box carefully in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

Note

Discard the used waste toner box according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

i

Put the belt unit back into the machine.

Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.

Routine maintenance j

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

1

k

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

1

2

A

85

l

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

m

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

n

Close the front cover of the machine.

86

Cleaning and Checking the machine

A

Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure that you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.

WARNING

DO NOT use any flammable substances, spray or organic solvent/liquids containing alcohol/ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

Routine maintenance

Cleaning the outside of the machine

A

a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

b

Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

IMPORTANT

Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the surface of the machine.

c

Wipe the outside of the machine with a dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.

A

d

Remove any paper that is in the paper tray.

87

e

Wipe the inside and the outside of the paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.

f

Re-load the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

g

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.

Cleaning the scanner glass

a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

b

Unfold the ADF document support (1) and then open the ADF cover (2).

Clean the white bar (3) and the scanner glass strip (4) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.

Close the ADF cover (2) and fold the

ADF document support (1).

2 3

4

1

A

c

Lift the document cover (1).

Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.

1

2

3

88

d

In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.

2

1

Routine maintenance

Cleaning the laser scanner windows

A

a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

Note

In addition to cleaning the scanner glass and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water, run your finger tip over the glass to see if you can feel anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris, clean the glass again concentrating on that area. You may need to repeat the cleaning process three or four times. To test, make a copy after each cleaning.

e

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.

A

89

c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

90

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

Routine maintenance e

Wipe the four scanner windows (1) with a dry, lint-free cloth.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

1

1

f

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

A

91

g

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

i

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

1

2

h

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

j

Close the front cover of the machine.

k

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.

1

92

Cleaning the corona wires

If you have print quality problems, clean the four corona wires as follows: a

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

A

Routine maintenance b

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

93

A

c

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it toward the machine to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

d

Push to release the latches of the corona wire cover (1), and then open the cover.

1

94

e

Clean the corona wires inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tabs from left to right and right to left several times.

Routine maintenance f

Close the corona wire cover.

1

Note

Be sure to return the tab to the home position (a) (1). If you do not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.

g

Repeat steps d to f to clean each of

three remaining corona wires.

A

95

h

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

i

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

C

M

Y

K

C - Cyan

Y - Yellow

M - Magenta

K - Black

96

j

Close the front cover of the machine.

Cleaning the drum unit

If your printout has coloured dots at 94 mm intervals, follow the steps below to solve the problem.

a

Make sure that the machine is in the

Ready mode.

b

Press MENU.

c

Press a or b to display

Print Reports

.

Press Print Reports.

d

Press a or b to display

Drum Dot Print

.

Press Drum Dot Print.

e

The machine will display Press Start.

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

f

The machine will print the Drum Dot test print. Then press Stop/Exit.

g

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

A

Routine maintenance h

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

A

97

i

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

j

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

98

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and/or the toner cartridge on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

Routine maintenance k

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slightly push it to unlock it. Then pull it out of the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

IMPORTANT

To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

A

99

l

Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles. Make sure that the drum unit gears (1) are on the left hand side.

n

On the problem colour drum, use the numbered markers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a cyan dot in column 2 on the check sheet would mean that there is a mark on the cyan drum in the "2" region.

1

m

Note the following information from the drum dot check sheet:

 Dot colour

For example, a mark on the cyan drum would produce a cyan dot on the check sheet.

 Dot location

Note which of the printed columns the dot appears in.

100

o

Turn the drum unit gear toward you by hand while looking at the surface of the suspected area.

Routine maintenance r

Hold the handle of the toner cartridge and slide the toner cartridge into the drum unit, then slightly pull it toward you until you hear it click into place. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the drum unit. Repeat this for all the toner cartridges.

p

When you have found the mark on the drum that matches the drum dot check sheet, wipe the surface of the drum gently with a cotton swab until the dust or paper powder on the surface comes off.

Y

K

C

M

IMPORTANT

DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.

q

Turn the drum unit over by holding the green handles.

C - Cyan

Y - Yellow

M - Magenta

K - Black

101

A

s

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

u

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

1

v

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

t

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

1

2

w

Close the front cover of the machine.

102

x

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, connect all cables, and then plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine.

Routine maintenance

Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers

If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows: a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

b

Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

A

103

A

c

Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad (1) of the paper tray with it to remove dust.

1

d

Wipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside the machine to remove dust.

1

Calibration

The output density for each colour may vary depending on the environment the machine is in such as temperature and humidity.

Calibration helps you to improve the colour density.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Printer.

Press Printer.

c

Press a or b to display Calibration.

Press Calibration.

d

Press Calibrate.

e

The machine will display Calibrate?.

Press Yes to confirm.

f

The machine will display Completed.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

You can reset the calibration parameters back to those set at the factory.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Printer.

Press Printer.

c

Press a or b to display Calibration.

Press Calibration.

d

Press Reset.

e

The machine will display Reset?.

Press Yes to confirm.

f

The machine will display Completed.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

A

e

Put the paper tray back in the machine.

f

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket. Turn on the machine.

104

Note

• If an error message is displayed, press

Mono Start or Colour Start and try again.

(For more information, see Error and

maintenance messages on page 107.)

• If you print using the Windows

®

printer driver, the driver will get the calibration data automatically if both Use Calibration

Data and Get Device Data

Automatically are on. The default settings are on. (See Advanced tab in the

Software User's Guide.)

• If you print using the Macintosh printer driver, you need to perform the calibration using the Status Monitor. After turning the Status Monitor on, choose Color

Calibration from the Control menu. (See

Status Monitor in the Software User's

Guide. When the Status Monitor is open, choose Control / Color Calibration from the menu bar.)

Routine maintenance

Auto Registration

Registration

If solid areas of colour or images have cyan, magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the auto-registration feature to correct the problem.

A

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Printer.

Press Printer.

c

Press a or b to display Auto Regist..

Press Auto Regist..

d

The machine will display

Registration?

.

Press Yes.

e

The machine will display Completed.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

A

A

105

Manual Registration

If colour still appears incorrectly after autoregistration, you will need to perform manual registration.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Printer.

Press Printer.

c

Press a or b to display

Manual Regist.

.

Press Manual Regist..

d

Press Print Chart.

e

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

f

When the machine has finished printing the registration chart, press

Set Regist.

to correct the colour manually.

g

Starting at 1 Magenta Left on the chart, check which coloured bar has the most uniform print density. Press

1 Magenta Left

and choose the number on the Touchscreen, using d or c to display more numbers if necessary.

Repeat for 2 Cyan Left,

3 Yellow Left

, 4, 5, 6 to 9.

h

Press OK if you finished entering the numbers.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

A

Frequency

(Colour Correction)

You can set how often the colour correction

(Colour Calibration and Auto Registration) occurs. The default setting is Normal. The colour correction process consumes some amount of the toner.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Printer.

Press Printer.

c

Press a or b to display Frequency.

Press Frequency.

d

Press Normal, Low or Off.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

A

106

B

Troubleshooting

B

Error and maintenance messages

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown below.

You can clear most errors and perform routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:

Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

B

Error Message

Access Denied

Access Error

Calibration failed.

Cartridge Error

Put the Black (K)

Toner Cartridge back in.

1

1

The toner cartridge colour with the problem is shown in the message.

Comm.Error

Cause

The function you want to use is restricted by Secure Function

Lock.

The device is removed from the

USB direct interface while the data is processing.

Calibration failed.

Action

Contact your administrator to check your

Secure Function Lock Settings.

Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try to print with Direct Print.

The toner cartridge is not installed correctly.

 Turn off the machine. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing

the drum unit on page 69.)

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 74.)

 Put in a new waste toner box. (See

Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.)

 If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.

Pull out the drum unit and remove the toner cartridge for the colour that is indicated on the

LCD, then re-install the toner cartridge in the drum unit. Put the drum unit back into the machine.

Poor telephone line quality caused a communication error.

Try sending the fax again or try connecting the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, call the telephone company and ask them to check your telephone line.

B

107

Error Message

Condensation

Connection Fail

Cooling Down

Wait for a while

Cover is Open.

Cover is Open

Cover is Open

DIMM Error

Disconnected

Cause

One of the issues that can cause this error is that condensation may form inside the machine after a room temperature change.

You tried to poll a fax machine that is not in Polled Waiting mode.

The temperature of the drum unit or toner cartridge is too hot.

The machine will pause its current print job and go into cooling down mode. During the cooling down mode, you will hear the cooling fan running while the LCD shows Cooling

Down

, and Wait for a while

.

Action

Leave the machine powered on, and fully open the front cover. Wait 30 minutes, switch

OFF and close the cover, then switch ON. If this does not clear the error, call your Brother dealer.

Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.

Make sure that you can hear the fan in the machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet is not blocked by something.

If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles that surround the exhaust outlet, and then leave the machine turned on but do not use it for several minutes.

If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the machine from the power for several minutes, then reconnect it.

Close the front cover of the machine.

The front cover is not completely closed.

The ADF cover is not completely closed.

The ADF is open while loading a document.

The fuser cover is not completely closed or paper was jammed in the back of the machine when you turned on the power.

The DIMM is not installed correctly.

The DIMM is broken.

The DIMM does not meet the required specifications.

The other person or other person’s fax machine stopped the call.

Close the ADF cover of the machine.

Close the ADF cover of the machine, then press Stop/Exit.

 Close the fuser cover of the machine.

Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of the machine, and then close the fuser cover and press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Turn off the machine and remove the

DIMM.

 Confirm the DIMM meets the required specifications. (See Memory board in

Appendix B of the Advanced User's

Guide.)

 Re-install the DIMM correctly. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.

 If this error message appears again, replace the DIMM with a new one. (See

Installing extra memory in Appendix B of the Advanced User's Guide.)

Try to send or receive again.

108

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Document Jam

Drum Error

Drum Stop

Duplex Disabled

Low Temperature

Cause

The document was not inserted or fed correctly, or the document scanned from the ADF was too long.

The corona wire on the drum unit needs to be cleaned.

It is time to replace the drum unit.

The back of the machine is not closed completely.

Action

See Document jams on page 115 or Using

the automatic document feeder (ADF) on page 26.

Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See

Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)

Replace the drum unit. (See Replacing the

drum unit on page 69.)

Close the back cover of the machine.

Close the Back

Cover of the machine.

Duplex Disabled

Reload paper, then press Start.

Fuser Error

Jam Duplex

Jam Inside

Jam MP

Jam Rear

Jam Tray 1

Jam Tray 2

Limit Exceeded

Although the size of paper in the paper tray matches the paper size that was selected from the control panel or printer driver, the machine has stopped printing when it encountered an additional, different size of paper in the tray.

The paper tray was pulled out before the machine completed printing on both sides of the paper.

The temperature of the fuser unit does not rise to a specified temperature within the specified time.

The fuser unit is too hot.

The paper is jammed underneath Paper Tray 1 or in the fuser unit.

The paper is jammed inside the machine.

The paper is jammed in the MP tray of the machine.

The paper is jammed in the back of the machine.

The paper is jammed in the paper tray of the machine.

Make sure the paper tray contains only the size of paper you select in either the control panel or printer driver, then press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Re-install the paper tray and press

Mono Start or Colour Start.

Turn the power switch off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the machine for 15 minutes with the power on.

(See Paper is jammed underneath paper tray

1 on page 125.)

(See Paper is jammed inside the machine on page 121.)

(See Paper is jammed in the MP tray on page 117.)

(See Paper is jammed at the back of the

machine on page 119.)

(See Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2 on page 118.)

The number of pages you are allowed to print has been exceeded. The print job will be cancelled.

The room temperature is too low for the machine to operate.

Contact your administrator to check your

Secure Function Lock Settings.

Increase the room temperature to allow the machine to operate.

B

109

Error Message

No Belt Unit

No Paper

Cause

The belt unit is not installed correctly.

The machine is out of paper or paper is not correctly loaded in the paper tray.

Action

Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 74.)

Do one of the following:

 Refill the paper in the paper tray.

 Remove the paper and load it again.

If the problem is not resolved, the paper pick-up roller may need to be cleaned.

Clean the paper pick-up roller. (See

Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers on page 103.)

Contact your administrator to check your

Secure Function Lock Settings.

No Permission

You have attempted to print in colour using a Secure Function

Lock ID that is restricted to mono printing only. The print job will be cancelled.

No Response/Busy

The number you dialled does not answer or is busy.

No Toner

The toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD is not installed correctly.

No Tray

No Waste Toner

The paper tray indicated on the

LCD is not installed properly.

The waste toner box is not installed properly.

Verify the number and try again.

Pull out the drum unit. Take out the toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD, and then put it back into the drum unit.

Re-install the paper tray that is indicated on the LCD.

Re-install the waste toner box. (See

Replacing the waste toner box on page 80.)

110

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Out of Memory

Print Unable XX

Registration failed

Cause Action

The machine’s memory is full.

Fax sending or copy operation in progress

Do one of the following:

Press Mono Start or Colour Start to send or copy the scanned pages.

The machine has a mechanical problem.

 Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other operations in progress finish, and then try again.

 Clear the faxes from the memory.

Print the faxes that are stored in the memory to restore the memory to 100%.

Then turn off Fax Storage to avoid storing more faxes in the memory. (See Printing a

fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the

Advanced User's Guide and Fax Storage in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's

Guide.)

Add optional memory. (See Memory

board in Appendix B of the Advanced

User's Guide.)

Print operation in process

Do one of the following:

 Reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

 Clear the faxes from the memory. (See the above explanation.)

Do one of the following:

Registration failed.

 Turn off the machine, wait for a few minutes, and then turn it on again. (See

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal

report on page 114.)

 If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.

Do one of the following:

 Turn off the machine’s power switch. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.

 Try Manual Registration, MENU, Printer,

Manual Regist.

. (See Manual

Registration on page 106.)

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 74.)

 If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.

B

111

Error Message

Rename the File

Replace Parts

Belt Unit

Replace Parts

Drum Unit

Replace Parts

Fuser Unit

Replace Parts

PF Kit 1

PF Kit 2

PF Kit MP

Replace Parts

WT Box End Soon

Replace Toner X

Cause

There is already a file on the

USB Flash memory drive with the same name as the file you are trying to save.

Action

Change the name of the file on the USB Flash memory drive or the file you are trying to save.

It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the belt

unit on page 74.)

It is time to replace the drum unit.

Replace the drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

The drum unit counter was not reset when a new drum was installed.

Reset the drum unit counter.

It is time to replace the fuser unit.

It is time to replace the paper feeding kit.

(See Resetting the drum counter on page 74.)

Call your Brother dealer or a Brother

Authorized Service Center to replace the fuser unit.

Call your Brother dealer or a Brother

Authorized Service Center to replace the

PF Kit.

Replace WT Box

Scan Unable XX

Short paper

Size Error DX

Size mismatch

The waste toner box is near the end of its life.

The toner cartridge is at the end of its life.

It is time to replace the waste toner box.

The machine has a mechanical problem.

Document is too long for duplex scanning.

The length of the paper in the tray is too short for the machine to deliver it to the Face-down output tray.

The paper size defined in the printer driver is not usable for the automatic duplex printing.

The paper in the tray is not the correct size.

Buy a new waste toner box before you get a

Replace WT Box

message.

Replace the toner cartridge for the colour

indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a

Toner cartridge on page 62.)

Replace the waste toner box. (See Replacing

the waste toner box on page 80.)

 Turn off the machine and then turn it on

again. (See Transferring your faxes or Fax

Journal report on page 114.)

If the problem continues, call your Brother dealer.

Press Stop/Exit. Use the suitable size of

paper for duplex scanning. (See Document

Size on page 186.)

Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray. Remove the printed pages and then press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Press Mono Start or Colour Start. Choose a paper size which is supported by the duplex

tray. (See Print media on page 187.)

Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the “Paper Size” (MENU, General

Setup

, Tray Setting).

(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)

112

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Small paper

Toner Error

Toner Low

Too Many Files

Unusable Device

Cause

The paper size specified in the printer driver is too small for the machine to deliver it to the Face-

down output tray.

One or more toner cartridges are not installed correctly.

The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.

There are too many files stored on the USB Flash memory drive.

An incompatible or defective device has been connected to the USB direct interface.

Action

Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray and then press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Pull out the drum unit. Take out all the toner cartridges, and then put them back into the drum unit.

Buy a new toner cartridge for the colour that is indicated on the LCD before you get a

Replace Toner

message.

Reduce the number of files stored on the USB

Flash memory drive.

Remove the USB Flash memory drive from the USB direct interface.

113

B

Transferring your faxes or Fax

Journal report

B

If the LCD shows:

Print Unable XX

Scan Unable XX

We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your PC. (See

Transferring faxes to another fax machine on page 114 or Transferring faxes to your PC on page 114.)

You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you need to

transfer. (See Transferring the Fax Journal

report to another fax machine on page 114.)

Note

If there is an error message on the machine’s LCD after the faxes have been transferred, disconnect the machine from the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.

Transferring faxes to another fax machine

If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter

personal information (Station ID) in the Quick

Setup Guide.)

B

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Service.

Press Service.

c

Press Data Transfer.

d

Press Fax Transfer.

e

Do one of the following:

 If the LCD shows No Data, there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press Stop/Exit.

 Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

114

Transferring faxes to your PC

You can transfer the faxes from your machine’s memory to your PC.

a

Make sure that you have installed

MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.

(For details about PC-Fax Receive, see

PC-FAX receiving in the Software

User's Guide.) b

Make sure that you have set

PC Fax Receive

on the machine.

(See PC-Fax Receive in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide.)

If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the

LCD will ask if you want to transfer the faxes to your PC.

B

c

Do one of the following:

 To transfer all faxes to your PC, press Yes. You will be asked if you want a backup print.

 To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press No.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

Transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine

B

If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter

personal information (station ID) in the Quick

Setup Guide.) a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Service.

Press Service.

c

Press Data Transfer.

d

Press Report Trans..

e

Enter the fax number to which the Fax

Journal report will be forwarded.

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Document jams

Document is jammed in the top of the ADF unit

B

a

Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

b

Open the ADF cover.

c

Pull the jammed document out to the left.

B

Troubleshooting

Document is jammed under the document cover

B

a

Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

b

Lift the document cover.

c

Pull the jammed document out to the right.

d

Close the ADF cover.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

d

Close the document cover.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

B

115

Removing small documents jammed in the ADF

B

a

Lift the document cover.

b

Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.

Document is jammed at the output tray

B

a

Take out any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

b

Pull the jammed document out to the right.

c

Press Stop/Exit.

c

Close the document cover.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

116

Paper jams

Paper is jammed in the

MP tray

If the LCD shows Jam MP, follow these steps: a

Remove the paper from the MP tray.

b

Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.

B

B

Troubleshooting d

When loading paper in the MP tray, make sure that the paper stays under the maximum paper mark (1) on both sides of the tray.

1

c

Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.

e

Press Mono Start or Colour Start to resume printing.

B

117

Paper is jammed in paper tray 1 or tray 2

If the LCD shows Jam Tray 1 or

Jam Tray 2

, follow these steps: a

Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

For Jam Tray 1:

B

WARNING

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.

For Jam Tray 2: b

Use both hands to slowly pull out the jammed paper.

118

IMPORTANT

If the paper cannot easily be removed in this direction, stop and follow the

instructions for Paper is jammed inside the

machine on page 121.

Note

Pulling out the jammed paper downwards allows you to remove the paper easier.

c

Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b) (1) of the paper tray. While pressing the green paper-guide release lever, slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Make sure that the guides are firmly in the

slots. (See Loading paper in the

standard paper tray on page 11.)

1

Troubleshooting

Paper is jammed at the back of the machine

B

If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam occurred behind the back cover. Follow these steps: a

Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes to cool down.

b

Open the back cover.

d

Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

B

119

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the machine.

c

Pull the green tabs (2) at the left and right hand sides toward you and fold down the fuser cover (1).

2

3

2

1

3

Note

If the envelope levers (3) inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers to the original position before pulling the green tabs (2) down.

d

Using both hands, gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.

120

e

Close the fuser cover (1).

2

1

2

Note

If you are printing on envelopes, pull down the envelope levers (2) to the envelope position again before closing the back cover.

f

Fully close the back cover.

Troubleshooting

Paper is jammed inside the machine

B

If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these steps: a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket. b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

B

121

c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

122

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum unit and the toner cartridges on a clean, flat surface with a sheet of disposable paper or cloth underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

Troubleshooting e

Pull out the jammed paper slowly.

f

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

1

B

123

g

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

i

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

1

2

h

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

j

Close the front cover of the machine.

Note

If you turn off the machine while the LCD shows Jam Inside, the machine will print incomplete data from your computer.

Before you turn on the machine, delete the print spool job on your computer.

k

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, and reconnect all cables and the telephone line cord.

Turn on the machine.

124

Paper is jammed underneath paper tray 1

B

If the LCD shows Jam Duplex, follow these steps: a

Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes to cool down.

b

Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

Troubleshooting

WARNING

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high speed.

c

If paper is not caught inside the machine, turn the paper tray over and check underneath the paper tray.

Note

DO NOT put the paper tray back in at this point.

B

125

d

If the paper is not caught in the paper tray, open the back cover.

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before you touch the internal parts of the machine.

126

e

Push down and pull the green tabs at the left and right hand sides toward you and fold down the fuser cover (1).

Troubleshooting g

Close the fuser cover (1).

1

1 f

Using both hands, gently pull out the jammed paper.

h

Fully close the back cover.

i

Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

B

127

If you are having difficulty with your machine

If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.

Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother

Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a copy first. If the copy looks good, the problem may not be your machine. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips.

B

Printing or printing received faxes

Difficulties

 Condensed print

 Horizontal streaks

 Top and bottom sentences are cut off

Suggestions

Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

 Missing lines

Poor print quality

See Improving the print quality on page 138.

Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the drum

unit. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)

The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.

If the problem continues, call your dealer for service.

Received faxes appear as split or blank pages.

If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.

(See Paper Size and Type on page 18.)

Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax in Chapter 4 of the

Advanced User's Guide.)

Telephone line or connections

Difficulties

Dialling does not work.

The machine does not answer when called.

Suggestions

Check for a dial tone.

Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)

Check all line cord connections.

Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.

If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the handset of the external telephone and dialling the number. Wait to hear the fax receiving tones before pressing Mono Start or Colour Start.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See

Receive Mode settings on page 34.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your

machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.

128

Receiving Faxes

Difficulties

Cannot receive a fax.

Troubleshooting

Suggestions

Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to

DSL or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.

Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as

the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 34.)

If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.

If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.

If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In

Fax/Tel

mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and produce a fast double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.

If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming faxes, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.

Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your

Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:

 If the answer mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to

1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 34.)

 If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your answering machine to 2.

 If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.

Have someone send you a test fax:

 If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.

Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.

 If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.

B

129

Receiving Faxes (continued)

Difficulties

Cannot receive a fax.

(continued)

Suggestions

If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up

correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD on page 37.)

1

Connect the external TAD as shown in the illustration on page 37.

2 Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.

3 Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.

 Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.

 Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

 End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

4 Set your answering machine to answer calls.

5

Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive

Mode settings on page 34.)

Make sure your Brother machine's Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered the call on an

external or extension telephone. (See Fax Detect on page 35.)

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See

Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 137.)

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Sending faxes

Difficulties

Poor sending quality.

Transmission Verification Report says RESULT:ERROR.

Suggestions

Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.

(See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 88.)

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.

If you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the

Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Changing Remote Fax Options in

Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide), print fax messages in memory (see

Printing a fax from the memory in Chapter 4 of the Advanced User's Guide) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and cancelling waiting jobs in

Chapter 3 of the Advanced User's Guide). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See

Telephone line interference / VoIP on page 137.)

Sent faxes are blank.

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents on page 26.)

Vertical black lines when sending.

Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid

on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 88.)

Cannot send a fax.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

130

Troubleshooting

Handling incoming calls

Difficulties

The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a

CNG Tone.

Suggestions

If Fax Detect is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing

Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Fax Detect to Off. (See Fax

Detect on page 35.)

Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Remote

Activation code (default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.

Custom features on a single line.

If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes.

For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.

Copy difficulties

Difficulties

Cannot make a copy.

Vertical black line appears in copies.

Copies are blank.

Suggestions

 Make sure that COPY

is illuminated. (See How to copy on page 51.)

 Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the

glass strip, or one or more corona wires are dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner glass

on page 88 and Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)

Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Using the automatic

document feeder (ADF) on page 26 or Using the scanner glass on page 27.)

B

131

Printing difficulties

Difficulties

No printout.

The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage.

The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly, then some pages have text missing.

The headers or footers appear when the document displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is printed.

The machine does not print on both sides of the paper even though the printer driver setting is Duplex.

Suggestions

 Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.

 Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly. (See

Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

 Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.

(See the Quick Setup Guide.)

 Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.

Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and

maintenance messages on page 107.)

 Check the machine is online:

(Windows

®

7 and Windows Server

®

2008 R2) Click the Start button and

Devices and Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(Windows Vista

®

) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Hardware and

Sound, and then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(Windows

®

XP and Windows Server

®

2003/2008) Click the Start button and choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(Windows

®

2000) Click the Start button and choose Settings and then

Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use

Printer Offline is unchecked.

 Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.

 If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available. See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.

 Press Job Cancel to cancel print jobs.

Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with your machine.

Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with your machine.

 Your computer is not recognising the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup

Guide.)

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and

bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unscannable and

unprintable areas on page 17.)

Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You need to choose A4 [60 to

105 g/m

2

].

132

Troubleshooting

Printing difficulties (continued)

Difficulties

The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.

The machine does not change to

Direct Print mode when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.

Suggestions

 If either the Cyan, Magenta or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour document, the print job cannot be completed. You can choose to start the print job again in Mono mode, as long as black toner is available. See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.

 Press Job Cancel.

As the machine cancels the print job and clears it from the memory it may produce an incomplete printout.

When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the machine does not wake up when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface. Press the LCD surface or any key to wake up the machine. Then press Direct Print on the

LCD to display the Direct Print menu.

Scanning difficulties

Difficulties

TWAIN errors appear while scanning.

OCR does not work.

Network scanning does not work.

Cannot scan.

Suggestions

Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In

PaperPort™ 12SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN driver.

Try increasing the scanning resolution.

(Macintosh users)

Presto! PageManager must be downloaded and installed before use. See

Accessing Brother Support (Macintosh) on page 4 for further instructions.

See Network difficulties on page 135.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Software difficulties

Difficulties

Cannot install software or print.

Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’ printing.

The machine does not print from

Adobe

®

Illustrator

®

.

Suggestions

Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair and reinstall the software.

Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the same.

Try to reduce the print quality. (See Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

B

133

Paper handling difficulties

Difficulties

The machine does not feed paper.

The LCD shows No Paper or a

Paper Jam message.

The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.

How do I print on envelopes?

What paper can I use?

There is a paper jam.

Suggestions

 If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.

 If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled, you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over and put it back into the paper tray.

 Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.

 Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.

Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers on page 103.

 If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see

Error and maintenance messages on page 107.

 Make sure that MP tray is chosen in the printer driver.

 Fan the paper well and put it back in the tray firmly.

You can load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be set up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or

Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for more information.)

You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper, glossy paper, envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details,

see Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)

Clear the jammed paper. (See Error and maintenance messages on page 107.)

Print quality difficulties

Difficulties

Printed pages are curled.

Printed pages are smeared.

Printouts are too light.

Suggestions

 Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the paper tray.

 Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you

are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)

The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,

or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable

paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software User's

Guide.)

 If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, set

Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save in

Chapter 1 of the Advanced User's Guide)

 Remove the check in the Toner Save Mode check box in the Advanced tab of the printer driver. (See Advanced tab in the Software User's Guide.)

 In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the

Enhance Black Printing check box.

134

Troubleshooting

Network difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot print over a wired Network. If you are having Network problems see the Network User's Guide for more information.

The network scanning feature does not work.

Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in Ready mode. Print the Network Configuration Report to see your current Network settings. (See

Reports in Chapter 6 of the Advanced User's Guide.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. You can check the current wired network status from the Network control panel menu.

(Windows

®

)

It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, enter the information below:

 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.

 In Port number: Enter 54925.

 In Protocol: UDP is selected.

Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party

Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at http://solutions.brother.com/.

The network PC-Fax Receive feature does not work.

(Macintosh)

 The network scanning feature may not work due to the firewall settings.

Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal

Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.

 Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in

Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the model list in ControlCenter2.

(Windows

®

only)

It is necessary to set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX

Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:

 In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.

 In Port number: Enter 54926.

 In Protocol: UDP is selected.

Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party

Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at http://solutions.brother.com/.

B

135

Network difficulties (continued)

Difficulties

Your computer cannot find your machine.

Cannot connect to wireless network.

Suggestions

(Windows

®

) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)

(Macintosh)

 The computer may be unable to detect the machine due to the firewall settings. Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.

 Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in

Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.

Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report. Press MENU, Print Reports,

WLAN Report

. and then press Mono Start or Colour Start. For more details, see the Quick Setup Guide.

Other

Difficulties

The machine will not turn on.

Suggestions

Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.

If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a different known working outlet and turn on the machine.

136

Setting Dial Tone detection

When you send a fax automatically, by default your machine will wait for a fixed amount of time before it starts to dial the number. By changing the Dial Tone setting to

Detection

you can make your machine dial as soon as it detects a dial tone. This setting can save a small amount of time when sending a fax to many different numbers. If you change the setting and start having problems with dialling you should change back to the default No Detection setting.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Initial Setup

.

Press Initial Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Dial Tone.

Press Dial Tone.

d

Press Detection or No Detection.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

B

Troubleshooting

Telephone line interference /

VoIP

B

If you are having difficulty sending or receiving a fax due to possible interference on the telephone line, we recommend that you adjust the Equalization for compatibility to reduce the modem speed for fax operations.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Miscellaneous

.

Press Miscellaneous.

d

Press Compatibility.

e

Press Basic(for VoIP), Normal or

High

.

Basic(for VoIP)

reduces the modem speed to 9600 bps and turns the error correction mode (ECM) off.

For a standard telephone line: If you regularly experience interference on your standard telephone line try this setting.

If you are using VoIP: VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors try this setting.

Normal

sets the modem speed at

14400 bps.

High

sets the modem speed at

33600 bps.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

When you change the Compatibility to

Basic(for VoIP)

, the ECM feature is only available for colour fax sending.

B

137

Improving the print quality

If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (MENU, Printer, Print Options,

Test Print

). If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections or try printing a different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the following steps first. And then, if you still have a print quality problem, check the chart below and follow the recommendations.

Note

Brother does not recommend the use of cartridges other than Brother Original cartridges or the refilling of used cartridges with toner from other sources.

a

To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. Check that you use

paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21.)

b

Check that the drum unit and toner cartridges are installed properly.

B

Examples of poor print quality

White lines, bands or ribbing across the page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Colours are light or unclear on the whole page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.

 Make sure that you choose the correct media type in the printer driver

or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper

and other print media on page 21 and Basic tab in the Software

User's Guide.)

 Shake all four toner cartridges gently.

 Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See

Cleaning the laser scanner windows on page 89.)

Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)

138

Troubleshooting

Examples of poor print quality

White streaks or bands down the page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation

Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the

scanner glass on page 88.)

Wipe the laser scanner windows with a dry lint-free soft cloth. (See

Cleaning the laser scanner windows on page 89.)

Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)

 Identify the missing colour and put in a new toner cartridge. (See

Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Coloured streaks or bands down the page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Coloured lines across the page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

White spots or hollow print

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Clean all four corona wires (one for each colour) inside the drum unit

by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 93.)

 Make sure the corona wire green tabs are at their home positions (a).

Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the

scanner glass on page 88.)

 Replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the streak or

band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

 If coloured lines appear at 30 mm intervals, replace the toner

cartridge that matches the colour of the line. (See Replacing a Toner

cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

 If coloured lines appear at 94 mm intervals, put in a new drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu match the type of paper you are using.

(See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and Basic

tab in the Software User's Guide.)

Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location in the

Safety and Legal Booklet.)

Clean the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)

B

139

Examples of poor print quality

Completely blank or some colours are missing

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation

Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Coloured spots at 94 mm

94 mm

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 If the problem is not solved after printing, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean

the drum unit. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 97.)

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

94 mm

Coloured spots at 30 mm

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

30 mm

 Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

30 mm

Toner scatter or toner stain

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See

Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)

 Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the

drum unit on page 69.)

140

Troubleshooting

Examples of poor print quality

The colour of your printouts is not what you expected

All one colour

Recommendation

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.

Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)

 Adjust the colour by using the custom setting in the printer driver and by using the control panel of the machine. Colours the machine can print and colours you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not be able to reproduce the colours on your monitor.

 If colours appear in the printed grey areas, make sure there is a check in the Improve Grey Colour check box of the printer driver. (See

Basic tab for Windows

®

printer driver, Advanced options for

Windows

®

BR-Script printer driver, Print Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide.)

If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Grey

Colour check box.

 If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows

®

printer driver, Advanced options for Windows

®

BR-Script printer driver, Print

Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh

BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide.)

 Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Colour misregistration

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.

Perform the auto colour registration using the control panel (see Auto

Registration on page 105) or perform the manual colour registration

using the control panel (see Manual Registration on page 106).

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 74.)

B

141

Examples of poor print quality

Uneven density appears periodically across the page

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Recommendation

Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 104.)

Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the

scanner glass on page 88.)

 Identify the colour that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for

that colour. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 62.)

To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

Thin lines do not print

Wrinkle

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Offset image

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

 Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine or the printer driver.

 Change the print resolution.

 If you use a Windows

®

printer driver, choose Improve Pattern

Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings from the Basic tab. (See

Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide.)

Change to the recommended type of paper. (See Recommended

paper and print media on page 21.)

 Make sure that the back cover is closed properly.

 Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position. When you are using thick paper or envelopes, make sure the grey levers are in the down position to prevent wrinkling.

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.

 Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as low humidity and low temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See

Choosing a location in the Safety and Legal Booklet.)

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum unit on page 69.)

142

Examples of poor print quality

Poor fixing

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Curled or wavy

Troubleshooting

Recommendation

 Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 21 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide.)

 Make sure that the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.

 Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other

Print Options (For Windows

®

printer driver), Advanced options (For

Windows

®

BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the Software User's Guide.)

If this selection does not provide enough improvement, change the printer driver setting in Media Type to a thick setting.

Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For

Windows

®

printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows

®

BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the

Software User's Guide.)

 If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.

Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180

° in the paper tray.

 Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high temperatures and high humidity.

 Open the back cover (face-up output tray) to let the printed paper out on the face-up output tray.

B

143

Examples of poor print quality

Envelope creases

Recommendation

 Make sure that the two grey envelope levers are pulled down when you are printing envelopes.

 If creases occur with the envelope levers in the envelope position, print with the back cover opened and feed one envelope at a time from the MP tray.

144

Machine Information

Checking the Serial Number

B

You can see the machine’s Serial Number on the LCD.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Machine Info.

.

Press Machine Info..

c

The machine will display the machine’s

Serial Number on the LCD.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

B

Troubleshooting

Reset functions

The following reset functions are available:

1 Network

You can reset the internal print server back to its default factory settings such as the password and IP address information.

2 Address & Fax

Address & Fax resets the following settings:

 Address Book

(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup

Groups)

Programmed fax jobs in the memory

(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)

 Station ID

(name and number)

 Coverpage Msg

(comments)

Remote Fax Options

(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,

Fax Forwarding, Paging, PC-Fax

Send, and PC-Fax Receive

(Windows

®

only))

 Report settings

(Transmission Verification Report/

Tel Index List/Fax Journal)

 Setting Lock password

3 All Settings

You can reset all the machine settings back to the settings that were default factory settings.

Brother strongly recommends you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.

Note

Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network or All Settings.

B

B

145

How to reset the machine

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Initial Setup

.

Press Initial Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Reset.

Press Reset.

d

Press Network, Address & Fax or

All settings

to choose the reset function you want to use.

e

Do one of the following;

 To reset the settings, press Yes and

go to step f.

 To exit without making changes,

press No and go to step g.

f

You will be asked to reboot the machine.

Do one of the following;

 To reboot the machine press Yes for

2 seconds. The machine will begin the reboot.

 To exit without rebooting the

machine, press No. Go to step g.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You can also reset the Network settings by pressing MENU, Network,

Network Reset

.

B

146

C

Menu and features

On-screen programming

Your machine is designed to be easy to operate with LCD on-screen programming using the menu buttons on the Touchscreen.

User-friendly programming helps you take full advantage of all the menu selections your machine has to offer.

Since your programming is done on the LCD, we have created step-by-step on-screen instructions to help you program your machine. All you need to do is follow the instructions as they guide you through the menu selections and programming options.

C

Menu table

You can program your machine by using the

Menu table that begins on page 148. These

pages list the menu selections and options.

C

MENU button and mode keys

Access the main menu.

MENU

Access each mode and its menu of temporary settings.

C

Exit the menu or stop the current operation.

C

147

C

Menu table

The menu table will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine's programs. The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

C

MENU

Level 1

General Setup

Level 2

Mode Timer

Tray Setting

Level 3

MP Tray

Level 4

Options

0

Sec

30

Secs

1 Min

2

Mins*

5

Mins

Off

Paper Size

A4

*

Letter

Legal

Executive

A5

A5 L

A6

B5

B6

Folio

Any

Paper Type

Thin

Plain

*

Thick

Thicker

Recycled Paper

Glossy

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Descriptions

Sets the time to return to Fax mode and the time the machine will change from individual user to Public user mode when using Secure

Function Lock.

Page

See

1

.

Sets the size and type of paper in paper

MP tray.

18

C

148

Menu and features

Level 1

General Setup

(Continued)

Level 2

Tray Setting

(Continued)

Level 3

Tray#1

Level 4

Options

Paper Size

A4

*

Letter

Legal

Executive

A5

A5 L

A6

B5

B6

Folio

Paper Type

Thin

Plain

*

Thick

Descriptions

Sets the size and type of paper in paper tray #1.

Tray#2

(This menu only appears if you have the optional tray#2.)

Thicker

Recycled Paper

Paper Size

A4

*

Sets the size and type of paper in paper tray #2.

Letter

Legal

Executive

A5

B5

B6

Folio

Paper Type

Thin

Plain

*

Thick

Thicker

Recycled Paper

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

18

18

C

149

Level 1

General Setup

(Continued)

Level 2

Tray Setting

(Continued)

Level 3 Level 4

Tray Use:Copy

Options

Tray#1 Only

Descriptions

Chooses the tray that will be used for Copy mode.

Page

19

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

MP>T1>T2

*

T1>T2>MP

(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)

Tray#1 Only

Tray Use:Fax

Tray Use:Print

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

MP>T1>T2

T1>T2>MP

*

(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

MP>T1>T2

*

T1>T2>MP

(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Chooses the tray that will be used for Fax mode.

Chooses the tray that will be used for Print mode.

19

20

150

Menu and features

Level 1

General Setup

(Continued)

Level 2

Volume

Ecology

Level 3

Ring

Beeper

Speaker

Toner Save

Level 4

LCD Settings

Security

Sleep Time

Backlight

Dim Timer

Range varies depending on models.

3 Mins

*

Light

*

Med

Dark

Off

*

10 Secs

20 Secs

Function Lock Set Password

30 Secs

Lock OffiOn

Setup ID

Low

Med

*

High

On

Off

*

Options

Off

Low

Med

*

High

Off

Low

Med

*

High

Off

Setting Lock Set Password

Lock OffiOn

Descriptions

Adjusts the ring volume.

Adjusts the beeper volume.

Adjusts the speaker volume.

Increases the page yield of the toner cartridge.

Conserves power.

You can adjust the brightness of the

LCD backlight.

You can set how long the LCD backlight stays on for after the last key press.

You can restrict selected machine operations for up to

25 restricted users and all other nonauthorized Public users.

Stops unauthorized users from changing the machine’s current settings.

Page

10

10

10

See

1

.

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

C

151

MENU

Level 1

Fax

Level 2

Setup Receive

(In Fax mode only)

Level 3

Ring Delay

F/T Ring Time

Fax Detect

Remote Codes

Auto Reduction

Forward/Store

(Backup Print)

Level 4

Options

(0 - 8)

2

*

(Example for the

UK)

20

Secs

30

Secs*

40

Secs

70

Secs

On

*

Descriptions

Sets the number of rings before the machine answers in

Fax Only or Fax/Tel mode.

Sets the length of the fast double-ring time in Fax/Tel mode.

Off

On

On

(l51, #51)

Off

*

*

Receives fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones.

Allows you to answer all calls at an extension or external phone and use codes to turn the machine on or off. You can personalize these codes.

Reduces the size of incoming faxes.

Off

Off

*

Fax Forward

Fax Storage

PC Fax Receive

Sets the machine to forward fax messages, to store incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine), or to send faxes to your

PC.

If you chose Fax

Forward or PC-Fax

Receive, you can turn on the safety feature Backup Print.

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

34

34

35

41

See

1

.

C

152

Menu and features

Level 1

Fax

(Continued)

Level 2

Setup Receive

(In Fax mode only)

(Continued)

Level 3 Level 4

Print Density

Options

-2

-1

0

*

Descriptions

Makes printouts darker or lighter.

+1

+2

Setup Send

Report Setting

Fax Rx Stamp

Duplex

Batch TX

Coverpage Setting

XMIT report

Print Sample

Coverpage Note

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

*

*

*

On+Image

Off

*

Prints the received time and date on the top of the received faxes.

Prints receive faxes on both sides of the paper.

Combines delayed faxes going to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission.

You can print a sample of the fax cover page.

Set up your own comments for the fax cover page.

Choose the initial setup for the

Transmission

Verification Report.

Print Document

Remote Access

Journal Period

Off+Image

Off

Every 50 Faxes

*

Every 6 Hours

Every 12 Hours

Every 24 Hours

Every 2 Days

Every 7 Days

---l

Sets the interval for automatic printing of the Fax Journal.

If you have chosen other than Off and

Every 50 Faxes

, you can set the time for the chosen option.

If you have chosen

Every 7 Days

, you can also set the day of the week.

Prints incoming faxes stored in the memory.

Set your own code for

Remote Retrieval.

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

See

1

.

30

See

1

.

C

153

Level 1

Fax

(Continued)

Level 2 Level 3

Dial Restrict.

Dial Pad

Remaining Jobs

Miscellaneous

One Touch Dial

Speed Dial

LDAP Server

Compatibility

BT Call Sign

Level 4

Options

Off

Enter # twice

On

Off

*

Enter # twice

On

Off

On

Off

*

*

Enter # twice

Enter # twice

On

High

On

*

(U.K. only)

Off

*

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

*

Normal

Basic(for VoIP)

Descriptions

You can set the machine to restrict dialling when using the dial pad.

You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of

One Touch numbers.

You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of Speed

Dial numbers.

You can set the machine to restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers.

Check which scheduled jobs are in the memory and cancel chosen jobs.

Adjusts the equalization for transmission difficulties.

VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, choose

Basic(for VoIP)

.

Used with BT Call

Sign.

Page

See

1

.

137

See

1

.

154

Menu and features

MENU

Level 1

Printer

C

Level 2

Emulation

Print Options

Duplex

Output Color

Reset Printer

Level 3

Internal Font

Configuration

Test Print

Level 4

Calibration

Auto Regist.

Calibrate

Reset

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Options

Auto

*

HP LaserJet

BR-Script 3

HP LaserJet

BR-Script 3

Off

*

Long Edge

Short Edge

Auto

*

Color

B&W

Yes

No

Descriptions

Choose the emulation mode.

Prints a list of the machine’s internal fonts.

Prints a list of the machine’s printer settings.

Prints a test page.

Enables or disables duplex printing. You can also choose long edge or short edge duplex printing.

Chooses colour or black & white printed documents. If you choose Auto, the machine selects a suitable option for the document (color or

B&W).

Restores the printer settings to the original factory default settings.

Adjusts the colour density or returns the colour calibration to the factory settings.

Adjusts the print position of each colour automatically.

Page

See

1

104

105

.

C

155

Level 1

Printer

(Continued)

Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Manual Regist.

Print Chart

Options

Set Regist.

1 Magenta Left

2 Cyan Left

3 Yellow Left

4 Magenta Center

5 Cyan Center

6 Yellow Center

7 Magenta Right

8 Cyan Right

Frequency

9 Yellow Right

Normal

*

Low

Off

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Descriptions

Print the chart to manually check the registration of the colours.

Sets the correction value on the chart you printed from

Print Chart

.

Page

106

Sets the interval time you want to carry out the auto registration and the calibration.

106

156

Menu and features

MENU

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Print Reports XMIT Verify View on LCD

Print Report

Help List

— —

Options

Tel Index List Numerical

Order

Alphabetical

Order

Fax Journal

User Settings

Network Config

Drum Dot Print

WLAN Report

Order Form

1

2

See Advanced User's Guide

See Quick Setup Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Descriptions

Displays and prints a

Transmission

Verification Report for your last transmission.

Prints the Help List so you can see at-aglance how to quickly program your machine.

Lists names and numbers stored in the One Touch and

Speed Dial memory, in numerical or alphabetical order.

Page

See

1

.

C

Lists information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes.

(TX means Transmit.

RX means Receive.)

Lists your settings.

Lists your Network settings.

Prints the drum dot check sheet.

Prints the result of wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.

You can print an accessories order form to fill out and send to you Brother dealer.

97

See

2

.

See

1

.

C

157

MENU

Level 1

Network

1

Level 2 Level 3

Wired LAN TCP/IP

Level 4 Level 5

Boot Method

(IP Boot

Tries

)

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

Node Name

WINS Config

WINS Server

Options

Auto

*

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

Descriptions

Chooses the BOOT method that best suits your needs.

3

*

[00000-32767]

Specifies the number of setting trials when the

Boot Method allows automatic IP setting.

Enter the IP address.

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

Enter the Subnet mask.

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

Enter the Gateway address.

BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node name.

(Up to 32 characters)

Auto

*

Chooses the WINS configuration mode.

Static

Primary

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.

Secondary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

C

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

158

Menu and features

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

Wired LAN

(Continued)

Level 3

TCP/IP

(Continued)

Level 4 Level 5

DNS Server

APIPA

IPv6

Ethernet

Wired Status

MAC Address

Set to Default

Wired Enable

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Options

Primary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

Secondary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

On

*

Off

Descriptions

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.

On

Off

*

Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.

Enable or Disable the IPv6 protocol. If you want to use the

IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.

brother.com/ for more information.

Chooses the

Ethernet link mode.

Auto

*

100B-FD

100B-HD

10B-FD

10B-HD

Active 100B-FD

Active 100B-HD

You can see the current wired status.

Active 10B-FD

Active 10B-HD

InActive

Wired OFF

Yes

No

On

*

Off

Shows the MAC address of the machine.

Restore the wired network setting to factory default.

Enable or Disable the Wired LAN manually.

C

159

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

WLAN

Level 3

TCP/IP

Level 4 Level 5

Boot Method

(IP Boot

Tries

)

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

Node Name

WINS Config

WINS Server

Options

Auto

*

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

Descriptions

Chooses the BOOT method that best suits your needs.

3

*

[00000-32767]

Specifies the number of setting trials when the

Boot Method allows automatic IP setting.

Enter the IP address.

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

Enter the Subnet mask.

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX

Enter the Node name.

(Up to 32 characters)

Auto

*

Chooses the WINS configuration mode.

Static

Enter the Gateway address.

Primary

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary WINS server.

Secondary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

160

Menu and features

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

WLAN

(Continued)

Level 3

TCP/IP

(Continued)

Level 4 Level 5

DNS Server

APIPA

IPv6

Setup Wizard

WPS/AOSS

WPS w/PIN Code

WLAN Status Status

Options

Primary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

Secondary

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

On

*

Off

Descriptions

Specifies the IP address of the primary or secondary DNS server.

On

Off

*

Active(11b)

Active(11g)

Wired LAN Active

WLAN Off

Automatically allocates the IP address from the link-local address range.

Enable or Disable the IPv6 protocol. If you want to use the

IPv6 protocol, visit http://solutions.

brother.com/ for more information.

You can configure your internal print server.

You can easily configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.

You can easily configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.

You can see the current wireless network status.

AOSS Active

Connection Fail

C

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

161

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

WLAN

(Continued)

Level 3

WLAN Status

(Continued)

Level 4

Signal

Level 5

Options

Strong

Medium

Weak

Descriptions

You can see the current wireless network signal strength.

E-mail/IFAX

MAC Address

Set to Default

WLAN Enable

Mail Address

Setup Server

SSID

Comm. Mode

SMTP

None

Ad-hoc

Infrastructure

Yes

No

On

Off

*

You can see the current SSID.

You can see the current

Communication

Mode.

Shows the MAC address of the machine.

Restore the wireless network settings to factory default.

Enable or disable the wireless LAN manually.

Enter the mail address. (Up to 60 characters)

Enter the SMTP server address.

SMTP Server

Name

(Up to 64 characters)

IP Address

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

SMTP Port 25

*

[00001-65535]

Auth. for SMTP None

*

Enter the SMTP port number.

SMTP-AUTH

Selects the Security method for E-mail notification.

POP bef. SMTP

SMTP SSL/TLS None

*

Verify SMTPCert.

SSL

TLS

On

Off

*

You can send or receive an E-mail via an E-mail server that requires secure

SSL/TLS communication.

Verify the SMTP

Server Certificate automatically.

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

162

Menu and features

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

E-mail/IFAX

(Continued)

Level 3

Setup Server

(Continued)

Setup Mail RX

Level 4

POP3

Auto Polling

Level 5 Options

POP3 Server

Name

(Up to 64 characters)

IP Address

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255].

[000-255]

POP3 Port 110

*

[00001-65535]

Mailbox Name

Descriptions

Enter the POP3 server address.

Mailbox Pwd

POP3 SSL/TLS

None

SSL

TLS

Verify POP3Cert.

On

Off

*

APOP

Poll Frequency

(When Auto

Polling

is set to On.)

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

On

Off

*

On

*

Off

10

*

*

[01-60] Min

Enter the POP3 port number.

Enter the mail box name. (Up to 60 characters)

Enter the password to login to the POP3 server. (Up to 32 characters)

You can send or receive an E-mail via an E-mail server that requires secure

SSL/TLS communication.

Verify the POP3

Server Certificate automatically.

Enables or disables

APOP.

Automatically checks the POP3 server for new messages.

Sets the interval for checking for new messages on the

POP3 server.

C

163

Level 1

Network

1

(Continued)

Level 2

E-mail/IFAX

(Continued)

Level 3

Setup Mail RX

(Continued)

Level 4

Header

Fax to Server

Setup Mail TX

Del Error Mail

Notification

Sender Subject

Level 5

Size Limit

Notification

Setup Relay Rly Broadcast

Relay Domain

Relay Report

— —

Network Reset

— — —

1

See Network User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

On

Off

*

On

Off

*

On

Off

*

Options

All

Subject+From+To

None

*

On

*

Descriptions

Selects the contents of the mail header to be printed.

Deletes error mails automatically.

Off

On

MDN

Off

*

Receives notification messages.

Displays the subject that is attached to the Internet Fax data.

Limits the size of

E-mail documents.

Sends notification messages.

Relays a document to another fax machine.

Registers the

Domain name.

Prints the Relay

Broadcast Report.

On

Off

*

On

(Prefix/Suffix)

Off

*

Yes

No

You can store a prefix/suffix address in the machine and can send a document from a fax server system.

Restore all network settings to factory default.

164

Menu and features

MENU

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Machine Info.

Serial No.

Level 4

Options

Page Counter

— —

Parts Life Drum

Belt Unit

Fuser

Laser

PF Kit MP

PF Kit 1

PF Kit 2

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Total

Fax/List

Copy

Print

Descriptions

You can check the serial number of your machine.

You can check the number of total pages the machine has printed during its life.

Page

145

See

1

.

You can check the percentage of a machine part’s life that remains available.

(PF Kit 2 appears only if you installed the optional

LT-300CL paper tray.)

C

165

C

MENU

Level 1

Initial Setup

Level 2

Receive Mode

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Fax Only

*

Fax/Tel

External TAD

Descriptions

Chooses the receive mode that best suits your needs.

Date&Time

Station ID

Tone/Pulse

Dial Tone

Phone Line Set

Reset

Local Language

(in Eastern

Europe)

Date&Time

Auto Daylight

Time Zone

Network

Address & Fax

All Settings

Manual

On

*

Off

UTCXXX:XX

Fax:

Tel:

Name:

Tone

*

Pulse

Detection

No Detection

*

Normal

ISDN

*

Puts the date and time on the LCD and in headings of faxes you send.

Changes for Daylight

Savings Time automatically.

Sets the time zone for your country.

Sets up your name and fax number to appear on each page you fax.

Chooses the dialling mode.

You can shorten the dial tone detect pause.

Select the phone line type.

PBX

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

(Choose your language.)

1

2

See Advanced User's Guide.

See Quick Setup Guide.

3

See Network User's Guide.

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Restores all network settings to factory default.

Restores all stored phone numbers and fax settings.

Restores all the machine settings to the factory default.

Allows you to change the LCD language for your country.

Page

32

See

2

.

See

1

.

See

3

.

137

36

145

See

2

.

C

166

Menu and features

FAX ( )

Level 1 Level 2

Address Book More

Duplex Fax

Fax Resolution

Contrast

Glass ScanSize

Broadcasting

Manual

Level 3

Set One Touch Dial

Set Speed Dial

Setup Groups

Change

Delete

Address Book

Level 4

Options

Off

*

DuplexScan

:LongEdge

DuplexScan

:ShortEdge

Standard

*

Fine

S.Fine

Photo

Auto

*

Light

Dark

A4

*

Letter

Legal/Folio

Descriptions

Stores up to 40 One

Touch Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing one key

(and Mono Start or

Colour Start).

Stores up to 300

Speed Dial numbers, so you can dial by pressing only a few keys (and

Mono Start or

Colour Start).

Sets up to 20 Group numbers for

Broadcasting.

You can change One

Touch and Speed

Dial numbers.

You can delete One

Touch and Speed

Dial numbers.

Sets the duplex scanning format.

Page

46

48

See

1

.

C

Sets the resolution for outgoing faxes.

Changes the lightness or darkness of faxes you send.

To fax a Letter, Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the

Glass Scan Size setting.

You can send the same fax message to more than one fax number.

29

See

1

.

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

C

167

Level 1

Delayed Fax

Real Time TX

Polled TX

Coverpage Setup

Polling RX

Overseas Mode

Set New Default

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Options

On

Off

*

Descriptions

Sets the time of day in 24 hour format that delayed faxes will be sent.

Sends a fax without using the memory.

On

Off

*

Standard

Secure

Off

On

Off

*

*

Standard

Secure

Sets up your machine with a document to be retrieved by another fax machine.

Automatically sends a cover page you have programmed.

Sets up your machine to poll another fax machine.

Timer

Off

*

On

Off

*

If you are having difficulty sending faxes overseas, set this to On.

Fax Resolution

You can save your fax settings as the

Contrast default settings.

Glass ScanSize

Page

See

1

.

Factory Reset

— — —

Real Time TX

Coverpage Setup

— You can restore all fax settings to the factory settings.

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

168

Menu and features

COPY (

Level 1

Quality

)

Level 2

Level 3

Options 1

Auto

*

Text

Photo

Graph

100%

*

Enlarge

Options 2

Descriptions

You can choose the

Copy resolution for your type of document.

Enlarge/Reduce

Duplex Copy

Reduce

141% A5iA4

200%

50%

70% A4 i A5

78% LGLiLTR

83% LGLiA4

85% LTR i EXE

91% Full Page

94% A4 i LTR

97% LTRiA4

Custom (25-400%)

Off

*

2sidei2side

104% EXEiLTR

1sidei2side

LongEdgeFlip

2sidei1side

LongEdgeFlip

1sidei2side

ShortEdgeFlip

2sidei1side

ShortEdgeFlip

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

You can choose the enlargement ratio for the next copy.

You can choose the reduction ratio for the next copy.

You can choose the enlargement or reduction ratio for the next copy.

Enables or disables duplex printing. You can also choose long edge or short edge duplex printing.

Page

See

1

.

C

C

169

Level 1

Tray Use

Brightness

Contrast

Stack / Sort

Page Layout

Color Adjust

Level 2

Level 3

Options 1

Tray#1 Only

Tray#2 Only

MP Only

MP>T1>T2

*

T1>T2>MP

(Tray#2 or T2 appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)

Options 2

-2

+1

+2

-1

0

0

+1

-2

-1

Stack

*

+2

Sort

Off(1in1)

*

2in1(P)

2in1(L)

2in1(ID)

4in1(P)

4in1(L)

Red

0

+1

-2

-1

+2

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Descriptions

Chooses the tray that will be used for the copy operation.

Page

See

1

.

Adjusts the brightness for copies.

Adjusts the contrast for copies.

You can choose to stack or sort multiple copies.

You can make N in 1 and 2 in 1 ID copies.

Adjusts the red colour for copies.

170

Menu and features

Level 1

Color Adjust

(Continued)

Level 2

Level 3

Options 1

Green

Blue

Options 2

-2

+1

+2

-1

0

0

+1

-2

-1

Descriptions

Adjusts the green colour for copies.

Adjusts the blue colour for copies.

+2

Set New Default

— —

Quality

Brightness

Contrast

Color Adjust

— You can save your copy settings as the default settings.

Factory Reset

Favorite Settings

Favorite

Store

Favorite:1

Favorite:2

Favorite:3

Rename

Rename

Rename

Quality

Enlarge/Reduce

You can restore all copy settings to the factory settings.

You can save your

Favorite settings.

Duplex Copy

Tray Use

Brightness

Contrast

Stack / Sort

Rename

Favorite:1

Rename

Favorite:2

Rename

Favorite:3

Rename

Favorite:1

Favorite:2

Favorite:3

1

See Advanced User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page Layout

Color Adjust

You can rename your

Favorite settings.

You can apply your

Favorite settings as the default settings.

Page

See

1

.

C

171

SCAN ( )

Level 1 Level 2

Scan to USB Quality

File Type

Duplex Scan

File Name

Level 3

Level 4

Options

Color 100 dpi

*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Descriptions

You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

(If you chose a

Color or Gray option in the

Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

JPEG

XPS

(If you chose a

B&W option in the Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

TIFF

Off

*

DuplexScan

:LongEdge

DuplexScan

:ShortEdge

Chooses the duplex scanning format.

Enter a file name for the scanned data.

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

See

1

.

C

172

Menu and features

Level 1

Scan to USB

(Continued)

Scan to Network

Level 2 Level 3

Glass ScanSize

File Size

Set New Default

Factory Reset

(Profile name)

Quality

Level 4

Options

A4

*

Letter

Legal/Folio

Small

Middle

*

Descriptions

To scan a Letter,

Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the

Glass Scan Size setting.

You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.

Large

Quality

File Type

Glass ScanSize

You can save your scan to USB settings as the default settings.

Page

See

1

.

File Size

Color 100 dpi

*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

You can restore all scan to USB settings to the factory settings.

You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

File Type

B&W 200x100 dpi

(If you chose a

Color or Gray option in the

Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

JPEG

XPS

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

C

173

Level 1

Scan to Network

(Continued)

Level 2

(Profile name)

(Continued)

Level 3

File Type

(Continued)

Duplex Scan

Glass ScanSize

File Size

File Name

Level 4

Options

(If you chose a

B&W option in the Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

Descriptions

TIFF

Off

*

DuplexScan

:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex scanning format.

DuplexScan

:ShortEdge

A4

*

Letter

Legal/Folio

Small

Middle

*

To scan a Letter,

Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the

Glass Scan Size setting.

You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.

Large

BRNXXXXXXXXXX

Estimate

Report

*

Order sheet

Contract sheet

You can choose preset file names. If you choose

<Manual>

, you can name the file as you like.

Check

Receipt

<Manual>

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

See

1

.

174

Menu and features

Level 1 Level 2

Scan to FTP

(Profile name)

Level 3

Quality

File Type

Duplex Scan

Glass ScanSize

Level 4

Signed PDF

JPEG

XPS

(If you chose a

B&W option in the Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

TIFF

Off

*

DuplexScan

:LongEdge

DuplexScan

:ShortEdge

A4

*

Letter

Legal/Folio

Options

Color 100 dpi

*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Descriptions

You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

(If you chose a

Color or Gray option in the

Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Chooses the duplex scanning format.

To scan a Letter,

Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the

Glass Scan Size setting.

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

See

1

.

C

175

Level 1

Scan to FTP

(Continued)

Scan to E-mail

Level 2

(Profile name)

(Continued)

Manual

/

Address Book

Level 3

File Size

File Name

Quality

Level 4

File Type

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

(If you chose a

Color or Gray option in the

Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

JPEG

XPS

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Options

Small

Middle

*

Large

BRNXXXXXXXXXX

*

Estimate

Descriptions

You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.

Report

Order sheet

Contract sheet

Check

You can choose preset file names. If you choose

<Manual>

, you can name the file as you like.

Page

See

1

.

Receipt

<Manual>

Color 100 dpi

*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

You can choose the scan resolution and file format for your document.

Color 600 dpi

176

Menu and features

Level 1

Scan to E-mail

(Continued)

Level 2

Manual

/

Address Book

(Continued)

Level 3

File Type

(Continued)

Level 4

Options

(If you chose a

B&W option in the Quality setting)

PDF

*

PDF/A

Secure PDF

Signed PDF

Descriptions

Duplex Scan

TIFF

Off

*

DuplexScan

:LongEdge

Chooses the duplex scanning format.

Scan to PC E-mail

Image

Glass ScanSize

File Size

Number of

Destinations

Set New Default

Factory Reset

DuplexScan

:ShortEdge

A4

*

Letter

Legal/Folio

Small

Middle

*

To scan a Letter,

Legal or Folio size document, you'll need to change the

Glass Scan Size setting.

You can choose the file size for colour or greyscale scanning.

Large

Quality

File Type

Glass ScanSize

You can add multiple destination E-mail addresses.

You can save your scan to E-mail settings as the default settings.

File Size

You can restore all scan to E-mail settings to the factory settings.

You can scan a monochrome or a colour document into your E-mail application.

You can scan a colour picture into your graphics application.

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Page

See

1

.

C

177

Level 1

Scan to PC

(Continued)

Level 2

OCR

File

Level 3

Level 4

Options

1

Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Descriptions

You can have your text document converted to an editable text file.

You can scan a monochrome or a colour document into your computer.

Page

See

1

.

178

Menu and features

Other Functions

Level 1 Level 2

Direct Print

(Select File)

Level 3

Print Settings

/

(Copy Pages

(001–999))

Level 4 Options

Paper Size A4

*

Letter

Legal

Executive

A5

A5 L

A6

B5

B6

Descriptions

Sets the paper size when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.

Page

53

Folio

Paper Type

Thin

Plain

*

Thick

Sets the print media type when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.

Thicker

Recycled Paper

Glossy

Multiple Page 1in1

*

2in1

4in1

9in1

16in1

25in1

Sets the page layout when printing multiple pages directly from the USB

Flash memory drive.

53

53

1 in 2x2 pages

1 in 3x3 pages

1 in 4x4 pages

1 in 5x5 pages

Orientation

Duplex

Portrait

Off

*

*

Landscape

Long Edge

Short Edge

Sets the page orientation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Chooses the duplex print format when print directly from the

USB Flash memory drive.

53

53

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.

C

C

179

Level 1

Direct Print

(Continued)

Level 2

(Select File)

(Continued)

Level 3

Print Settings

/

(Copy Pages

(001–999))

(Continued)

Level 4

Collate

Tray Use

Options

On

*

Off

Auto

*

MP Only

Tray#1 Only

Descriptions

Enables or disables page collation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Chooses the tray when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Page

53

53

Index Print

Default Settings

Paper Size

Tray#2 Only

(Tray#2 Only appears only if you installed the optional paper tray.)

Print Quality Normal

*

PDF Option

Fine

Document

Document&Markup

Document&Stamps

A4

*

Letter

Legal

*

Executive

Sets the print quality option when printing directly from the USB

Flash memory drive.

Sets the USB direct print setting whether to print comments

(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file along with the text.

You can print a thumbnail page.

Sets the default paper size when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.

53

53

53

54

A5

A5 L

A6

B5

B6

Folio

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.

180

Menu and features

Level 1

Direct Print

(Continued)

Level 2

Default Settings

(Continued)

Level 3 Level 4

Paper Type

Multiple Page

Options

Thin

Plain

*

Thick

Thicker

Recycled Paper

Descriptions

Sets the default media type when printing directly from the USB flash memory drive.

Page

54

Glossy

1in1

2in1

4in1

*

9in1

16in1

25in1

1 in 2x2 pages

Sets the default page style when printing multiple pages directly from the USB

Flash memory drive.

54

1 in 3x3 pages

1 in 4x4 pages

Orientation

Collate

Print Quality

PDF Option

Index Print

1 in 5x5 pages

Portrait

*

Landscape

On

*

Off

Normal

Fine

Document&Markup

Document&Stamps

Simple

*

Document

*

Details

*

Sets the default page orientation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Enables or disables default page collation when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Sets the default print quality option when printing directly from the USB Flash memory drive.

Sets the default USB direct print setting whether to print comments (Markup) or stamps in the PDF file along with the text.

Sets the default index print option, simple format or details.

54

54

54

54

54

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.

C

181

Level 1 Level 2

Secure Print

(Select User)

Level 3

(Select Secure

Print Job)

Level 4

Password:

Options

Print

Delete

Descriptions

You can print data saved in the memory drive when you enter your four-digit password.

Page

See

1

.

(The Secure Print button on the LCD becomes active when there is secure data.)

1

See Software User's Guide

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

The Direct Print button on the LCD becomes active when a USB flash memory drive is connected to the USB direct interface.

182

Menu and features

Entering text

When you are setting certain menu selections, you may need to enter text into the machine.

Press to choose numbers, letters or special characters. Up to six letters are assigned to each button on the LCD.

By pressing the correct button repeatedly, you can access the character you want.

C

Inserting spaces

To enter a space, press to choose special characters, then press the space button or .

Note

The characters available may differ depending on your country.

Making corrections

If you entered an incorrect character and want to change it, use the arrow buttons to move the cursor under the incorrect character. Then press . Re-enter the correct character. You can also insert letters by moving the cursor and entering a character.

Repeating letters

If you need to enter a letter that is on the same button as the letter before it, press c to move the cursor to the right before you press the same button again.

C

183

D

Specifications

General

Note

This chapter provides a summary of the machine’s specifications. For additional specifications visit http://www.brother.com/ for details.

D

1

2

3

Printer Type

Print Method

Memory Capacity

LCD (liquid crystal display)

Power Source

Power Consumption

2

Laser

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning

256 MB

Touchscreen 5 in. (12.6 cm) Colour LCD

220 - 240 V AC 50/60Hz

Peak:

Copying (Average):

Sleep (WLAN: On)

(Average):

Deep Sleep (Average):

Ready (Average):

Measured diagonally

USB connection to PC

When making a copy from one sheet

1200 W

1

Approx. 615 W

Approx. 10 W

Approx. 1.8 W

Approx. 75 W

3

Dimensions

D

530 mm

490 mm

With Consumables: 28.5 kg

526 mm

Weight

184

Specifications

Noise level

1

Sound power

1

Operating

(Colour Copying):

Operating

(Monochrome Copying):

L

L

WA

WA d = 6.70 B (A) d = 6.67 B (A)

Office equipment with L

WA d > 6.30 B (A) is not suitable for use in room where people do primarily intellectual work. Such equipment should be placed in separate rooms because of the noise emission.

Ready:

Sound pressure

L

WA d = 4.21 B (A)

Operating (Printing):

Ready:

L

PA m = 57 dB (A)

L

PA m = 33 dB (A)

Measured in accordance with ISO 9296.

Temperature

Humidity

ADF (automatic document feeder)

Operating:

Storage:

10 to 32.5

°C

0 to 40

°C

20 to 80% (without condensation) Operating:

Storage: 10 to 90% (without condensation)

Up to 50 pages (Staggered) [80 g/m

2

]

185

D

Document Size

Document Size

(Single-sided)

Document Size

(2-sided (Duplex))

ADF Width: 147.3 to 215.9 mm

ADF Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm

Scanner Glass

Width:

Max. 215.9 mm

Scanner Glass

Length:

Max. 355.6 mm

ADF Width: 147.3 to 215.9 mm

ADF Length: 147.3 to 356.0 mm

D

186

Specifications

Print media

D

Paper Input Paper Tray

 Paper Type:

 Paper Size:

 Paper Weight:

 Maximum Paper Tray

Capacity:

Plain paper, Thin paper or Recycled paper

Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, A5 (Long

Edge), B6 (ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and

Folio

60 to 105 g/m

2

Up to 250 sheets of 80 g/m

2

Plain paper

Multi-purpose tray (MP tray)

Paper Type:

 Paper Size:

 Paper Weight:

 Maximum Paper Tray

Capacity:

Paper Tray 2 (option)

 Paper Type:

 Paper Size:

 Paper Weight:

 Maximum Paper Tray

Capacity:

Paper Output Face-Down Output Tray

Face-Up Output Tray

Envelope, Env. Thin, Env. Thick, Labels

Glossy paper, Thin paper, Thick paper,

Thicker paper, Recycled paper,

Bond paper or Plain paper

1

,

Width: 69.8 to 216 mm

Length: 116 to 406.4 mm

60 to 163 g/m

2

Up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m

2

Plain paper

Plain paper, Thin paper or Recycled paper

Letter, A4, B5 (ISO/JIS), A5, B6 (ISO),

Executive, Legal and Folio

60 to 105 g/m

2

Up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m

2

Plain paper

Up to 150 sheets (face down print delivery to the Face-down output tray)

One sheet (face up print delivery to the

Face-up output tray)

D

187

Duplex

Printing

 Manual Duplex:

 Automatic Duplex:

 Paper Size

(Automatic Duplex):

 Paper Weight

(Automatic Duplex):

 Paper Type

(Automatic Duplex):

Yes

Yes

A4

60 to 105 g/m

2

Plain paper, Thin paper, Recycled paper or

Glossy paper

1

For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine to avoid the possibility of smudging.

188

Specifications

Fax

Compatibility

Modem Speed

2-sided (Duplex) Print

Receiving

Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)

Sending

Scanning Width

Printing Width

Greyscale

Resolution

One Touch Dial

Speed Dial

Groups

Broadcasting

Automatic Redial

Memory Transmission

Out of Paper Reception

ITU-T Super Group 3

Automatic Fallback:

Yes

Yes (from ADF)

33,600 bps

Max. 208 mm

Max. 208 mm

8 bit/256 levels

Horizontal:

Vertical

 Standard:

8 dot/mm

3.85 line/mm (Mono)

Fine:

7.7 line/mm (Colour)

7.7 line/mm (Mono)

 Photo:

 Superfine:

40 (20

× 2)

300 stations

7.7 line/mm (Colour)

7.7 line/mm (Mono)

15.4 line/mm (Mono)

Up to 20

390 stations

3 times at 5 minute intervals

Up to 500

1

pages

2

Up to 500

1

pages

2

1

2

‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

Black & White only

D

D

189

Copy

Colour/Black

Copy Width

Automatic 2-sided (Duplex)

Copy

Yes/Yes

Max. 210 mm

Yes (from ADF)

Multiple Copies

Reduce/Enlarge

Resolution

First Copy Out Time

(Monochrome)

Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Up to 1200

× 600 dpi

Less than 19 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time (Colour) Less than 21 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)

D

190

Specifications

Scanner

Colour/Black

TWAIN Compliant

WIA Compliant

ICA Compliant

Colour Depth

Resolution

Yes/Yes

Yes (Windows

®

Windows

®

2000 Professional/Windows

®

XP/

XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista

®

/

Windows

®

7)

Mac OS X 10.4.11 – 10.6.x

1

Yes (Windows

®

XP/Windows Vista

®

/Windows

®

7)

Yes (Mac OS X 10.6.x)

48 bit internal / 24 bit external colour

Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated)

2

Up to 1200

× 2400 dpi (optical)

2

(from Scanner Glass)

Up to 1200

× 600 dpi (optical)

2

(from ADF)

Max. 210 mm

Yes (from ADF)

1

2

Scanning Width

Automatic 2-sided

(Duplex) Scanning

Greyscale

256 levels

For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Maximum 1200

× 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows

®

XP, Windows Vista

®

and Windows

®

7

(resolution up to 19200

× 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)

D

191

D

Printer

Automatic 2-sided

(Duplex) Print

Emulations

Resolution

Print Speed

(Monochrome Duplex)

Print Speed

(Colour Duplex)

Print Speed

(Monochrome)

Print Speed

(Colour)

First Print Out Time

(Monochrome)

First Print Out Time

(Colour)

Yes

PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript

®

3™)

600 dpi

× 600 dpi, 2400 dpi (2400 × 600) quality

Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)

(A4 size)

1

Up to 14 sides/minute (7 sheets/minute)

(A4 size)

1

Up to 28 pages/minute (A4 size)

1

Up to 28 pages/minute (A4 size)

1

Less than 16 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)

Less than 16 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)

1

The print speed may vary depending on the type of document you print.

D

192

Specifications

Interfaces

USB

It is recommended you use a USB 2.0 cable (Type A/B) that is no

more than 2 metres long.

1 2

Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.

Ethernet

3

2

3

1

Wireless LAN

3

IEEE 802.11 b/g (Infrastructure / Ad-hoc Mode)

Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a

USB 1.1 interface.

Third party USB ports are not supported.

See Network (LAN) on page 199 and the Network User's Guide for detailed network specifications.

D

193

D

Direct Print feature

Compatibility

Interface

PDF version 1.7

1

, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother

printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),

PostScript

®

3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS version 1.0.

USB direct interface

1

PDF data including a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.

D

194

Scan to USB feature

File formats

Black and white

TIFF, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF

Color and Gray document

JPEG, PDF, PDF/A, Secure PDF, Signed PDF, XPS

Specifications

D

195

D

Computer requirements

Computer Platform &

Operating System

Version

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions

Processor

Minimum Speed

Minimum

RAM

Recommended

RAM

Hard Disk Space to install

For

Drivers

For

Applications

Supported

PC

Software

Functions

Windows

®

Operating

System

1

Windows

®

2000

Professional

Windows

Vista

® 2 6

5

Windows

®

XP

Home

2 6

Windows

®

XP

Professional

2 6

Windows

®

XP

Professional x64

Edition

2 6

Intel

®

Pentium

®

II or equivalent

64-bit (Intel

®

AMD64)

64 or supported CPU

64 MB 256 MB 150 MB 500 MB Printing,

PC-Fax

4

Scanning

,

128 MB

256 MB

512 MB

512 MB

1 GB 500 MB 1.2 GB

Windows

®

7

2 6

Intel

®

Pentium

®

4 or equivalent

64-bit (Intel

®

64 or

AMD64) supported CPU

Intel

®

Pentium

®

4 or equivalent

64-bit (Intel

®

64 or

AMD64) supported CPU

1 GB

(32-bit)

2 GB

(64-bit)

1 GB

(32-bit)

2 GB

(64-bit)

650 MB

Supported

PC

Interface

3

USB,

10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

D

196

Specifications

Computer Platform &

Operating System

Version

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions

Processor

Minimum Speed

Minimum

RAM

Recommended

RAM

Hard Disk Space to install

For

Drivers

For

Applications

Supported

PC

Software

Functions

Windows

Server

®

2003

(print only via network)

Intel

®

Pentium or equivalent

®

III

256 MB 512 MB 50 MB N/A

Supported

PC

Interface

3

Printing 10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

Windows

Server

®

2003 x64

Edition

(print only via network)

Windows

Server

®

2008

(print only via network)

Windows

Server

®

2008 R2

(print only via network)

Mac OS X

10.4.11

10.5.x

64-bit (Intel

AMD64) supported CPU

Intel

®

Pentium or equivalent

64-bit (Intel

®

AMD64)

®

4

64 or supported CPU

64-bit (Intel

AMD64)

®

®

64 or

64 or supported CPU

512 MB 2 GB

1

2

3

4

5

6

Macintosh

Operating

System

Mac OS X

10.6.x

PowerPC G4/G5

Intel

®

Core™

Processor

Intel

®

Core™

Processor

512 MB

1 GB

1 GB

2 GB

80 MB 400 MB Printing,

PC-Fax

Send

4

,

Scanning

USB,

10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

Internet Explorer

®

6.0 or greater.

For WIA, 1200 x 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.

Third party USB ports are not supported.

PC-Fax supports black and white only. (Letter/A4 size)

PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft

®

SP4 or higher for Windows

®

2000. (Available from the Internet)

PaperPort™ 12SE supports Microsoft

®

SP3 or higher for Windows

®

XP and SP2 or higher for Windows Vista

®

and

Windows

®

7.

For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/.

All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.

D

197

Consumable items

Toner Cartridge Life

Drum Unit

Belt Unit

Waste Toner Box

Standard Toner Cartridge:

TN-320BK (Black):

TN-320C (Cyan):

TN-320M (Magenta):

TN-320Y (Yellow):

Approx. 2,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 1,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 1,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 1,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

High Capacity Toner Cartridge:

TN-325BK (Black):

TN-325C (Cyan):

TN-325M (Magenta):

TN-325Y (Yellow):

Approx. 4,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 3,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 3,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 3,500 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Super High Capacity Toner Cartridge:

TN-328BK (Black): Approx. 6,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

TN-328C (Cyan):

TN-328M (Magenta):

Approx. 6,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 6,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

TN-328Y (Yellow):

DR-320CL

BU-300CL

WT-300CL

Approx. 6,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

1

Approx. 25,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

2

Approx. 50,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

3

Approx. 50,000 pages

(A4 or Letter)

3

1

2

3

Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.

Approx. yield is based on A4 or Letter single-sided pages.

198

D

Specifications

Network (LAN)

Note

For details about the full Network specifications, see Network User's Guide.

LAN

You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,

Network Scanning, PC-Fax Send, PC-Fax Receive (Windows

®

only) and Remote Setup

1

. Also included is Brother BRAdmin Light

Network Management software.

2

Security Protocols

Wired

Wireless

Wireless Network

Security

Wireless Network

Setup Support Utility

APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,

SMTP, POP), SNMP v3, 802.1x (EAP-MD5, EAP-FAST, PEAP,

EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS), Kerberos

APOP, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SSL/TLS (IPPS, HTTPS,

SMTP, POP), SNMP v3

WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), 802.1x

(LEAP, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS)

AOSS™

WPS

Yes

Yes

1

2

See Computer requirements on page 196.

BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

D

199

D

E

Index

A

ADF (automatic document feeder) using

.....................................................26

Answering machine (TAD) connecting

.............................................37

Apple Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide.

Automatic fax receive

.............................................33

Fax Detect

..........................................35

fax redial

...............................................43

B

Belt unit replacing

...............................................74

C

Cleaning corona wires

..........................................93

drum unit

...............................................97

laser scanner windows

..........................89

scanner

.................................................88

Connecting external TAD (answering machine)

.......37

external telephone

................................39

Consumable items

...................... 58

,

59

,

60

Control panel overview

..............................6

ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)

See Software User’s Guide.

ControlCenter4 (for Windows

®

)

See Software User’s Guide.

Cordless telephone (non-Brother)

............40

D

Dialling a pause

.................................................44

automatic fax redial

...............................43

manual

..................................................42

One Touch

............................................42

Speed Dial

............................................42

using the Search

...................................43

Direct print

............................................... 52

Direct key

............................................. 53

specification

........................................ 194

Document how to load

..................................... 26

,

27

Drum unit cleaning

.......................................... 93

,

97

replacing

............................................... 68

E

Envelopes

............................. 15

,

21

,

22

,

24

Equalization

........................................... 137

Error messages on LCD

........................ 107

Comm. Error

....................................... 107

No Paper

............................................ 110

Out of Memory

.................................... 111

Print Unable XX

.................................. 111

Scan Unable XX

................................. 112

Extension telephone, using

............... 39

,

41

External telephone, connecting

............... 39

F

Fax codes changing

............................................... 41

remote activation code

......................... 41

remote deactivation code

..................... 41

Fax, stand-alone receiving fax detect

........................................... 35

from extension telephone

............ 39

,

41

ring delay, setting

.............................. 34

telephone line interference

.............. 137

sending

................................................. 28

telephone line interference

.............. 137

Fax/Tel mode answering at extension telephones

...... 41

F/T ring time (double-ring)

.................... 34

fax detect

.............................................. 35

receiving faxes

..................................... 39

remote activation code

......................... 41

remote deactivation code

..................... 41

ring delay

.............................................. 34

Folio

................................................... 18

,

22

200

G

Greyscale

...................................... 189

,

191

H

HELP

LCD messages

...................................147

Menu Table

.........................................148

L

Labels

...................................13

,

21

,

22

,

25

LCD (liquid crystal display)

............... 6

,

147

M

Machine information how to reset the machine

....................146

reset functions

....................................145

serial number

......................................145

Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide.

Maintenance, routine

...............................87

replacing belt unit

..............................................74

drum unit

............................................68

toner cartridge

....................................62

waste toner box

.................................80

Manual dialling

...................................................42

receive

..................................................33

Menu Table

............................................148

Mode, entering copy

......................................................51

fax

.........................................................28

scan

........................................................ 6

Multi-line connections (PBX)

....................38

N

Network faxing

See Software User’s Guide.

printing

See Network User’s Guide.

scanning

See Software User’s Guide.

O

One Touch changing

............................................... 49

setting up

.............................................. 46

using

..................................................... 42

Out of Memory message

....................... 111

P

Paper

............................................... 21

,

187

how to load

........................................... 11

in paper tray

...................................... 11

in the multi-purpose tray

.................... 13

recommended

................................ 21

,

22

size

................................................. 18

,

21

tray capacity

......................................... 22

type

................................................ 18

,

21

PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR

See Software User’s Guide and Help in the

PaperPort™ 12SE application to access

How-to-Guides.

PC-Fax

See Software User’s Guide.

Presto! PageManager

See Software User's Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.

Print difficulties

................................... 128

,

132

drivers

................................................ 192

quality

......................................... 134

,

138

resolution

............................................ 192

specifications

...................................... 192

Printing

See Software User’s Guide.

Programming your machine

.................. 147

E

201

E

Q

Quality printing

....................................... 134

,

138

Quick dial

.................................................46

Group dial changing

............................................49

One Touch dial changing

............................................49

custom scan profile

............................46

setting up

...........................................46

using

..................................................42

search

...................................................43

Speed Dial changing

............................................49

custom scan profile

............................48

setting up

...........................................48

using

..................................................42

R

Redial/Pause key

.............................. 43

,

44

Remote setup

See Software User’s Guide.

Replacing belt unit

.................................................74

drum unit

...............................................68

toner cartridge

.......................................62

waste toner box

.....................................80

Reports

Transmission Verification

......................30

Resolution copy

....................................................190

fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo)

..................................................189

print

.....................................................192

scan

....................................................191

Ring delay, setting

...................................34

S

Scanner glass using

..................................................... 27

Scanning

See Software User’s Guide.

Serial number how to find ..............See inside front cover

Sockets

EXT external telephone

............................. 39

TAD (answering machine)

................. 37

Speed Dial changing

............................................... 49

setting up

.............................................. 48

using

..................................................... 42

T

TAD (telephone answering device), external

.................................................... 33

connecting

............................................ 37

recording OGM

..................................... 38

Tel/R key

.......................................7

,

39

,

40

Telephone line connections

.......................................... 37

difficulties

............................................ 128

interference

........................................ 137

multi-line (PBX)

.................................... 38

Text, entering

........................................ 183

Toner cartridge replacing

............................................... 62

Troubleshooting

..................................... 128

document jam

............................. 115

,

116

error messages on LCD

..................... 107

if you are having difficulty copy quality

..................................... 131

incoming calls

.................................. 131

network

............................................ 135

paper handling

................................ 134

print quality

.............................. 134

,

138

printing

.................................... 128

,

132

receiving faxes

................................ 129

scanning

.......................................... 133

sending faxes

.................................. 130

software

........................................... 133

telephone line

.................................. 137

maintenance messages on LCD

........ 107

paper jam

..........117

,

118

,

119

,

121

,

125

202

V

VoIP

.......................................................137

Volume, setting beeper

...................................................10

ring

........................................................10

speaker

.................................................10

W

Waste toner box replacing

...............................................80

Windows

®

See Software User’s Guide.

Wireless Network

See Quick Setup Guide and Network

User’s Guide.

E

203

This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.

ADVANCED

USER’S GUIDE

MFC-9970CDW

Version 0

UK/IRE

i

User's Guides and where do I find it?

Which manual?

Safety and Legal

Quick Setup Guide

Basic User's Guide

Network Glossary

Network User's Guide

What's in it?

Read this Guide first. Please read the

Safety Instructions before you set up your machine. See this Guide for trademarks and legal limitations.

Follow the instructions for setting up your machine and installing the drivers and software for the operating system and connection type you are using.

Learn the basic Fax, Copy, Scan and

Direct Print operations and how to replace consumables. See troubleshooting tips.

Advanced User's Guide

Learn more advanced operations: Fax,

Copy, security features, printing reports and performing routine maintenance.

Software User's Guide

Follow these instructions for Printing,

Scanning, Network Scanning, Remote

Setup, PC-Fax, and using the Brother

ControlCenter utility.

This Guide provides basic information about advanced network features of

Brother machines along with explanations about general networking and common terms.

This Guide provides useful information about wired and wireless network settings and security settings using the

Brother machine. You can also find supported protocol information for your machine and detailed troubleshooting tips.

Where is it?

Printed / In the box

Printed / In the box

Printed / In the box

For

HUN/BUL/ROM/POL/SVK/CZE:

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

PDF file /

Documentation CD-ROM /

In the box

Table of Contents

1

2

3

General Setup 1

Memory storage..................................................................................................... 1

Automatic daylight savings time ............................................................................ 1

Ecology features.................................................................................................... 2

Toner Save ...................................................................................................... 2

Sleep mode ..................................................................................................... 2

Deep Sleep mode............................................................................................ 3

LCD screen............................................................................................................ 3

Setting the backlight brightness....................................................................... 3

Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight ........................................................... 3

Mode Timer............................................................................................................ 4

Security features 5

Secure Function Lock 2.0 ...................................................................................... 5

Setting and changing the Administrator Password.......................................... 6

Setting up and changing the Public user mode ............................................... 7

Setting up and changing restricted users ........................................................ 7

Turning Secure Function Lock on/off............................................................... 9

Switching Users............................................................................................. 10

Setting Lock......................................................................................................... 11

Setting up the password ................................................................................11

Changing your Setting Lock password ..........................................................12

Turning Setting Lock on/off............................................................................ 12

Restricting dialling................................................................................................13

Dial pad restriction.........................................................................................13

One Touch restriction ....................................................................................13

Speed Dial restriction ....................................................................................13

LDAP server restriction..................................................................................14

Sending a fax 15

Additional sending options................................................................................... 15

Sending faxes using multiple settings ........................................................... 15

Changing a 2-sided fax layout ....................................................................... 15

Contrast ......................................................................................................... 16

Changing Fax Resolution .............................................................................. 16

Additional sending operations.............................................................................. 17

Sending a fax manually ................................................................................. 17

Dual access (black & white only)................................................................... 17

Broadcasting (black & white only) ................................................................. 18

Real Time Transmission................................................................................19

Overseas Mode ............................................................................................. 20

Delayed Fax (black & white only) ..................................................................20

Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................20

Checking and cancelling waiting jobs............................................................ 21

Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 21

Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings ............................................21

Electronic cover page (black & white only).................................................... 22

ii

iii

4

5

6

Polling overview...................................................................................................24

Polled transmit (black & white only)...............................................................24

Receiving a fax 25

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)............................................................25

Out of Paper Reception .................................................................................25

Fax Forwarding..............................................................................................25

Fax Storage ...................................................................................................26

PC-Fax Receive ............................................................................................27

Changing Remote Fax Options .....................................................................28

Remote retrieval ............................................................................................29

Remote fax commands..................................................................................31

Additional receiving operations............................................................................32

Printing a reduced incoming fax ....................................................................32

Duplex (2-sided) printing for Fax mode .........................................................32

Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only).....................................33

Setting the Print Density ................................................................................33

Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................34

Polling overview...................................................................................................35

Polling receive ...............................................................................................35

Dialling and storing numbers 37

Telephone line services .......................................................................................37

BT Call Sign (U.K. only).................................................................................37

Additional dialling operations ...............................................................................37

Combining quick dial numbers ......................................................................37

Additional ways to store numbers........................................................................38

Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................38

Options for Setting Up Groups ......................................................................40

Changing Group numbers .............................................................................41

Deleting Group numbers ...............................................................................42

Printing reports 43

Fax reports...........................................................................................................43

Transmission verification report.....................................................................43

Fax Journal ....................................................................................................43

Reports ................................................................................................................44

How to print a report ......................................................................................44

7

A

B

C

D

Making copies 45

Copy settings.......................................................................................................45

Stop copying.................................................................................................. 45

Improving copy quality................................................................................... 45

Enlarging or reducing the image copied ........................................................46

Duplex (2-sided) Copying .............................................................................. 47

Tray selection ................................................................................................48

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast ................................................................ 48

Sorting copies using the ADF ........................................................................ 49

Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ...............................................................49

2 in 1 ID Copy................................................................................................51

Adjusting Colour (Saturation) ........................................................................ 52

Setting your changes as the new default....................................................... 52

Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings ......................................... 52

Setting your favourites................................................................................... 53

Routine maintenance 54

Cleaning and checking the machine....................................................................54

Checking the Page Counters.........................................................................54

Checking the remaining life of parts .............................................................. 55

Replacing periodic maintenance parts................................................................. 55

Packing and shipping the machine ......................................................................56

Options 66

Optional paper tray (LT-300CL)...........................................................................66

Memory board...................................................................................................... 66

SO-DIMM Types............................................................................................66

Installing extra memory ................................................................................. 67

Glossary 69

Index 73

iv

v

1

General Setup

1

Memory storage

Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost. Temporary settings (for example,

Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also, during a power failure the machine will retain the date and time and programed fax timer jobs (e.g. Delayed Fax) for up to 60 hours.

Other fax jobs in the machine memory will not be lost.

1

Automatic daylight savings time

You can set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It will set itself forward one hour in the Spring, and back one hour in the Autumn.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Initial Setup

.

Press Initial Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Date&Time.

Press Date&Time.

d

Press Auto Daylight.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

1

1

2

Chapter 1

Ecology features

Toner Save

You can save toner using this feature. When you set Toner Save to On, prints appear lighter. The default setting is Off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Ecology.

Press Ecology.

d

Press Toner Save.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

We do not recommend Toner Save for printing Photo or Greyscale images.

1

1

Sleep mode

The Sleep Mode Setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep

Mode (Power Save mode) it acts as though it were turned off. Receiving data or starting an operation wakes up the machine from Sleep mode to Ready mode.

The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a fax or computer data or making a copy. The default setting is 3 minutes.

When the machine goes into Sleep mode, the

LCD back light turns off.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Ecology.

Press Ecology.

d

Press Sleep Time.

e

Using the dial pad on the Touchscreen, enter the length of time the machine will remain idle before entering sleep mode.

Press OK.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

Deep Sleep mode

If the machine is in Sleep mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will go into Deep Sleep mode automatically. Deep Sleep mode uses less power than Sleep mode. The machine will wake up and start warming up when the machine receives a fax or computer data, or when you press the Touchscreen or a key on the control panel.

When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the LCD backlight is Off and the mode keys are dimmed.

If a wireless network is enabled, the machine will not enter Deep Sleep mode. To disable the wireless network, see Chapter 5 in the

Network User's Guide.

If the machine has secure print data it will not enter Deep Sleep mode.

1

General Setup

LCD screen

1

Setting the backlight brightness

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight. If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, try changing the brightness setting.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.

Press LCD Settings.

d

Press Backlight.

e

Press Light, Med or Dark.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

Setting the Dim Timer for the backlight

1

You can set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go back to the Ready screen.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display LCD Settings.

Press LCD Settings.

d

Press Dim Timer.

e

Press Off, 10 Secs, 20 Secs or

30 Secs

.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

1

3

4

Chapter 1

Mode Timer

The machine has three mode keys on the control panel: FAX, SCAN, and COPY.

You can set how much time the machine takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the machine will stay in the mode you used last.

This setting also sets the time the machine will change from a restricted user to the

Public mode when using Secure Function

Lock. (See Switching Users on page 10.)

1

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Mode Timer.

Press Mode Timer.

d

Press 0 Sec, 30 Secs, 1 Min,

2 Mins

, 5 Mins or Off.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

2

Security features

2

Secure Function Lock 2.0

2

Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public access to the following machine functions:

 Fax Tx

 Fax Rx

 Copy

 Scan

 Direct Print

Print

 Color Print

This feature also prevents users from changing the Default settings of the machine by limiting access to the MENU settings.

Before using the security features you must first enter an administrator password.

Access to restricted operations can be enabled by creating a restricted user.

Restricted users must enter a user password to use the machine.

Make a careful note of your password. If you forget it, you will have to reset the password stored in the machine. For information about how to reset the password call your Brother dealer for service.

Note

• Secure Function Lock can be set manually at the control panel or by using Web

Based Management. We recommend using Web Based Management to configure this feature. For more information, see the Network User's

Guide.

• Only administrators can set limitations and make changes for each user.

• Polling Receive is enabled only when both

Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.

2

5

6

Chapter 2

Setting and changing the

Administrator Password

Setting up the password

The password you set in these steps is for the administrator. This password is used to set up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on

or off. (See Setting up and changing

restricted users on page 7 and Turning

Secure Function Lock on/off on page 9.)

2

Note

Make a careful note of the administrator password. If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will show

Wrong Password

. Re-enter the correct password. If you forget it, please call your

Brother dealer for service.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Enter a four-digit number for the password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

f

Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.

Press OK.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

2

Changing the password

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Set Password.

f

Enter the registered four-digit password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Enter a four-digit number for the new password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

h

Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.

Press OK.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

2

Setting up and changing the

Public user mode

2

Public user mode restricts the functions that are available for Public users. Public users do not need to enter a password to access the features made available through this setting.

You can set up one Public user.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Setup ID.

f

Enter the administrator password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Press a or b to display Public.

Press Public.

h

Do one of the following:

To set up the Public user, press

Enable

or Disable for each operation, as follows: Press Fax Tx.

Then press Enable or Disable.

After you have set Fax Tx, repeat these steps for Fax Rx, Copy,

Scan

, Direct Print, Print and

Color Print

.

 To change the Public user settings, pressa or b to display the setting you want to change. Press the setting and press Enable or Disable.

Repeat this step until you finish changing settings.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

Security features

Setting up and changing restricted users

You can set up users with restrictions and a password for functions that are available to them. You can set up more advanced restrictions, such as by page count or PC user login name, through Web Based

Management. (For more information, see the

Network User's Guide.) You can set up to 25 restricted users with restrictions and a password.

2

2

Setting up restricted users

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Setup ID.

f

Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Press a or b to display User01.

Press User01.

h

Enter the user name by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See

Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic

User's Guide.)

Press OK.

i

Enter a four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

2

7

8

Chapter 2 j

To set up a restricted user, press

Enable

or Disable for each operation, as follows: Press Fax Tx. Then press

Enable

or Disable. After you have set

Fax Tx

, repeat these steps for

Fax Rx

, Copy, Scan, Direct Print,

Print

and Color Print.

k

Repeat steps g to j for entering each

additional user and password.

l

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You cannot use the same name as another user's name.

Changing user name, password or settings for restricted users

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Setup ID.

f

Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Press a or b to display the existing restricted user you want to change.

Press the user name.

h

Press Change.

To change the user name, enter a new user name by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See Entering text in

Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide.)

Press OK.

2

i

To change the password, enter a new four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

j

To change a restricted user's settings, press a or b to display the setting you want to change. Press the setting and then press Enable or Disable.

Repeat this step until you are finished making changes.

k

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

You cannot use the same name as another user's name.

Reset existing restricted users

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Setup ID.

f

Enter the four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Press a or b to display the existing restricted user you want to reset.

Press the user name.

h

Press Reset.

i

Press Yes to reset the existing restricted user.

j

Press Stop/Exit.

2

Turning Secure Function

Lock on/off

Turning Secure Function Lock on

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Function Lock.

e

Press Lock OffiOn.

f

Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

2

Security features

Turning Secure Function Lock off

a

Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is the user’s name).

b

Press Lock OniOff.

c

Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

Note

If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will show Wrong Password. Re-enter the correct password.

2

9

Chapter 2

Switching Users

This setting allows you to switch between registered restricted users or Public mode when Secure Function Lock is turned on.

Changing to the restricted user Mode

a

Press Public or xxxxx (where xxxxx is the user’s name).

Press Change User.

b

Press a or b to display your user name.

c

Press your user name.

d

Enter the registered four-digit user password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

2

Changing to the Public Mode

a

Press xxxxx. (where xxxxx is the user’s name.) b

Press Go to Public.

Note

• After a restricted user has finished using the machine, it will return to the Public setting within the same time as the Mode

Timer setting. (See Mode Timer on page 4.)

• If your ID has set page limit restrictions and already reached the maximum number of pages, the LCD will show

Limit Exceeded

when you print data.

Contact your administrator to check your

Secure Function Lock Settings.

• If your ID has set Colour Print restrictions to Disable, the LCD will show

No Permission

when you try to print coloured data. The machine prints the data in black & white only.

10

Setting Lock

Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop other people from accidentally changing your machine settings.

Make a careful note of your password. If you forget it, you will have to reset the passwords stored in the machine. Please call your administrator or your Brother dealer.

While Setting Lock is On, you cannot access

MENU

and Address Book Functions.

Also, machine settings cannot be changed through the Remote Setup utility while Setting

Lock is On.

2

Security features

Setting up the password

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Setting Lock.

e

Enter a four-digit number for the password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

f

Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.

Press OK.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

2

2

11

Chapter 2

Changing your Setting Lock password

2

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Setting Lock.

e

Press Set Password.

f

Enter the registered four-digit password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

g

Enter a four-digit number for the new password by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

h

Re-enter the password when the LCD shows Verify.

Press OK.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

Turning Setting Lock on/off

If you enter the wrong password when following the instructions below, the LCD will show Wrong Password. Re-enter the correct password.

Turning Setting Lock on

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

General Setup

.

Press General Setup.

c

Press a or b to display Security.

Press Security.

d

Press Setting Lock.

e

Press Lock OffiOn.

f

Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

2

Turning Setting Lock off

a

Press Setting Lock on the LCD.

b

Enter the registered four-digit administrator password by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

12

Restricting dialling

This feature is to prevent users from sending a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.

You can set the machine to restrict dialling by using the dial pad, One Touch and Speed

Dial.

If you choose Off, the machine does not restrict the dialling method.

If you choose Enter # twice, the machine will prompt you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will show an error message.

If you choose On, the machine will restrict all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method.

2

Dial pad restriction

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Dial Restrict

.

Press Dial Restrict.

d

Press Dial Pad.

e

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

2

Security features

One Touch restriction

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Dial Restrict

.

Press Dial Restrict.

d

Press One Touch Dial.

e

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Speed Dial restriction

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Dial Restrict

.

Press Dial Restrict.

d

Press Speed Dial.

e

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

2

2

2

13

Chapter 2

LDAP server restriction

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Dial Restrict

.

Press Dial Restrict.

d

Press LDAP server.

e

Press Off, Enter # twice or On.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

• The Enter # twice setting will not work if you lift an external handset before entering the number. You will not be asked to re-enter the number.

• The machine cannot restrict dialling from

Redial/Pause.

• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you cannot use the Broadcasting feature and cannot combine quick dial numbers when dialling.

2

14

3

Sending a fax

3

Additional sending options

Sending faxes using multiple settings

3

Before you send a fax, you can change any combination of these settings: duplex fax, contrast, resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer, polling transmission, real time transmission, broadcast, glass scan size or cover page settings.

a

Press

The LCD shows:

FAX

Duplex Fax Fax Resolution

Address Book

Off Standard

3

Changing a 2-sided fax layout

3

You need to choose the duplex scanning format before you send a 2-sided fax. The format you choose will depend on the layout of your 2-sided document.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Duplex Fax.

Press Duplex Fax.

c

Do one of the following:

 If your document is flipped on the

Long edge, press

DuplexScan :LongEdge

.

3

Long edge

Portrait Landscape b

Press d or c to display a setting you want to change and press the setting, then press the option you want.

c

Do one of the following:

Repeat step b to change more

settings.

 If you are finished choosing settings, go to the next step for sending your fax.

Note

• Most settings are temporary and the machine returns to its default settings after you send a fax.

• You can save some of the settings you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you

change them again. (See Setting your

changes as the new default on page 21.)

 If your document is flipped on the

Short edge, press

DuplexScan :ShortEdge

.

Short edge

Portrait Landscape d

Press Stop/Exit.

15

Chapter 3

Contrast

For most documents the default setting of

Auto

will give the best results.

Auto

automatically chooses the suitable contrast for your document.

If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast may improve the quality of the fax.

Use Dark to make the faxed document lighter.

Use Light to make the faxed document darker.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Contrast.

Press Contrast.

c

Press Auto, Light or Dark.

Note

Even if you choose Light or Dark, the machine will send the fax using the Auto setting if you choose Photo as the Fax

Resolution.

3

Changing Fax Resolution

The quality of a fax can be improved by changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can be changed for the next fax.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display

Fax Resolution

.

Press Fax Resolution.

c

Press Standard, Fine, S.Fine or

Photo

.

Note

You can choose four different resolution settings for black & white faxes and two for colour.

3

Black & white

Standard

Fine

S.Fine

Photo

Suitable for most typed documents.

Good for small print and transmits a little slower than

Standard resolution.

Good for small print or artwork and transmits slower than Fine resolution.

Use when the document has varying shades of grey or is a photograph. This has the slowest transmission time.

Colour

Standard

Fine

Suitable for most typed documents.

Use when the document is a photograph. The transmission time is slower than Standard resolution.

If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then use the Colour Start key to send a fax, the machine will send the fax using the

Fine

setting.

16

Additional sending operations

Sending a fax manually

Manual transmission

Manual transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.

3

a

Make sure you are in Fax mode

(FAX).

b

Load your document.

c

Pick up the handset of an external telephone and listen for a dial tone.

d

Dial the fax number you want to call.

e

When you hear the fax tones, press

Mono Start or Colour Start.

 If you are using the scanner glass, press Send.

f

Replace the handset of an external telephone.

3

3

Sending a fax

Dual access

(black & white only)

You can dial a number, and start scanning the fax into memory—even when the machine is sending from memory, receiving faxes or printing PC data. The LCD will show the new job number.

The number of pages you can scan into the memory will vary depending on the data that is printed on them.

Note

If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning the first page of a fax, press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you get an Out of Memory message while scanning a subsequent page, you can press Mono Start to send the pages scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

3

3

17

Chapter 3

Broadcasting

(black & white only)

Broadcasting lets you send the same fax message to more than one fax number. You can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial numbers and up to 50 manually dialled numbers in the same broadcast.

You can broadcast to up to 390 different numbers. This will depend on how many groups, access codes or credit card numbers you have stored, and on how many delayed or stored faxes in memory.

3

Before you begin the broadcast

One Touch and Speed Dial numbers must be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. (See Storing One

Touch Dial numbers and Storing Speed Dial

numbers in Chapter 7 of the Basic User's

Guide.)

Group numbers must also be stored in the machine's memory before they can be used in a broadcast. Group numbers include many stored One Touch Dial and Speed Dial

numbers for easier dialling. (See Setting up

Groups for Broadcasting on page 38.)

3

How to broadcast a fax

Note

To help you choose numbers easily, press

Address Book

or (Search).

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display Broadcasting.

Press Broadcasting.

d

You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:

 Press Manual and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen. (See How to dial in

Chapter 7 of the Basic User's Guide.)

Press OK.

 Press Address Book. Press to search by Alphabetical Order or

Numerical Order. Put a check in the check box beside each number you want to include in the broadcast.

Press OK.

3

Note

One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.

Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

e

After you have entered all the fax

numbers by repeating step d, press OK.

f

Press Mono Start.

After the broadcast is finished the machine will print a broadcast report to let you know the results.

Note

The scan profile of the One Touch,

Speed Dial or Group number you chose

first will be applied to the broadcast.

18

Cancelling a Broadcast in progress

While broadcasting you can cancel the fax currently being sent or the whole broadcast job.

3

a

PressStop/Exit.

b

Do one of the following:

 To cancel the entire broadcast, press

Entire Broadcast

. Go to step c.

 To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number

being dialled. Go to step d.

 To exit without cancelling, press

Stop/Exit.

c

When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire broadcast, do one of the following:

Press Yes to confirm.

 To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.

d

Do one of the following:

 To cancel the current job, press Yes.

 To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Real Time Transmission

When you are sending a fax, the machine will scan the documents into the memory before sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone line is free, the machine will start dialling and sending.

Sometimes, you may want to send an important document immediately, without waiting for memory transmission. You can turn on Real Time TX.

3

Note

• If the memory is full and you are sending a black and white fax from the ADF, the machine will send the document in real time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be sent until you clear some of the memory.

• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display Real Time TX.

Press Real Time TX.

d

Press On.

3

19

Chapter 3

Overseas Mode

If you are having difficulty sending a fax overseas due to a bad connection, then turning on Overseas Mode may help.

This is a temporary setting, and will only be active for your next fax.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display

Overseas Mode

.

Press Overseas Mode.

d

Press On.

3

Delayed Fax

(black & white only)

You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory to be sent within a twenty-four hour period.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display Delayed Fax.

Press Delayed Fax.

d

Press On.

e

Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. (For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

Press OK.

Note

The number of pages you can scan into the memory depends on the amount of data printed on each page.

3

Delayed batch transmission

(black & white only)

3

Before sending the delayed faxes, your machine will help you economize by sorting all the faxes in the memory by destination and scheduled time.

All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be sent at the same time to the same fax number will be sent as one fax to save transmission time.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display Setup Send.

Press Setup Send.

d

Press Batch TX.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

20

Checking and cancelling waiting jobs

Check which jobs are still waiting in the memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the

LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in the memory.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Remaining Jobs

.

Press Remaining Jobs.

Jobs that are waiting will appear on the

LCD.

d

Press a or b to scroll through the jobs and press the job you want to cancel.

Press OK.

e

Do one of the following:

To cancel, press Yes. If you want to

cancel another job go to step d.

 To exit without cancelling, press No.

f

When you have finished cancelling jobs, press Stop/Exit.

3

Sending a fax

Setting your changes as the new default

3

You can save the fax settings for

Fax Resolution

, Contrast,

Real Time TX

, Glass ScanSize and

Coverpage Setup

you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you change them again.

a

Press b

Press d or c to choose the setting you want to change, and then press the new option.

Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.

c

After changing the last setting, press d or c to display

Set New Default

.

Press Set New Default.

d

Press Yes.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

Restoring all fax settings to the factory settings

3

You can restore all the fax settings you have changed to the factory settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.

a

Press b

After changing the last setting, press d or c to display

Factory Reset

.

Press Factory Reset.

c

Press Yes.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

3

21

Chapter 3

Electronic cover page

(black & white only)

This feature will not work unless you have already programmed your Station ID. (See the Quick Setup Guide.)

You can automatically send a cover page with every fax. Your cover page includes your

Station ID, a comment, and the name (or number) stored in the One Touch or Speed

Dial memory.

By choosing On you can also display the number of pages on the cover page.

You can choose one of the following preset comments.

1.Comment Off

2.Please Call

3.Urgent

4.Confidential

Instead of using one of the preset comments, you can enter two personal messages of your own, up to 27 characters long. Use the chart on Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic

User's Guide for help entering characters.

(See Composing your own comments on page 22.)

5.

(User Defined)

6.

(User Defined)

3

Composing your own comments

You can set up two comments of your own.

3

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display Setup Send.

Press Setup Send.

d

Press Coverpage Setting.

e

Press Coverpage Note.

f

Press 5 or 6 to store your own comment.

g

Enter your own comment by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

Use the chart on Entering text in

Appendix C of the Basic User's Guide for help entering characters.

h

Press Stop/Exit.

22

Send a cover page for all faxes

You can set the machine to send a cover page whenever you send a fax.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display

Coverpage Setup

.

Press Coverpage Setup.

c

Press On (or Off).

d

Press the comment you want to add.

e

Enter two digits to show the number of pages you are sending.

Press OK.

For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or

0

, 0 to leave the number of pages blank.

If you make a mistake, press Clear to back up and re-enter the number of pages.

3

Sending a fax

Using a printed cover page

If you want to use a printed cover page that you can write on, you can print the sample page and attach it to your fax.

3

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display Setup Send.

Press Setup Send.

d

Press Coverpage Setting.

e

Press Print Sample.

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

g

After the machine prints a copy of your cover page, press Stop/Exit.

3

23

Chapter 3

Polling overview

Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.

3

Polled transmit

(black & white only)

Polled transmit lets you set up your machine to wait with a document so another fax machine can call and retrieve it.

3

Setup for polled transmit

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display Polled TX.

Press Polled TX.

d

Press Standard.

e

Press Mono Start.

f

If you are using the scanner glass, the

LCD will prompt you to choose one of the following options:

 Press Yes to scan another page.

Go to step g.

 Press No or Mono Start to send the document.

g

Place the next page on the scanner glass and press Mono Start. Repeat

steps f and g for each additional

page.

h

Your machine will automatically send the fax.

3

Note

The document will be stored and can be retrieved from any other fax machine until you delete the fax from memory.

To delete the fax from memory, press

MENU

, Fax, Remaining Jobs. (See

Checking and cancelling waiting jobs on page 21.)

Setup for polled transmit with a secure code

3

Secure polling lets you restrict who can get the documents you set up to be polled.

Secure polling only works with Brother fax machines. If another person wants to retrieve a fax from your machine they will have to enter the secure code.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Press d or c to display Polled TX.

Press Polled TX.

d

Press Secure.

e

Enter a four-digit number.

Press OK.

f

Press Mono Start.

g

If you are using the scanner glass, the

LCD will prompt you to choose one of the following options:

 Press Yes to scan another page. Go

to step h.

 Press No or Mono Start to send the document.

h

Place the next page on the scanner glass and press Mono Start. Repeat

steps g and h for each additional

page.

i

Your machine will automatically send the fax.

24

4

Receiving a fax

4

Remote Fax Options

(black & white only)

Remote Fax Options are NOT available for colour faxes.

Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes while you are away from the machine.

You can use only one Remote Fax Option at a time.

4

Out of Paper Reception

As soon as the paper tray becomes empty during fax reception, the LCD shows

No Paper

. Put some paper in the paper tray.

(See Loading paper and print media in

Chapter 2 of the Basic User's Guide.)

The machine will carry on receiving the fax, with the remaining pages being stored in memory, if enough memory is available.

Incoming faxes will continue to be stored in the memory until the memory becomes full or paper is loaded in the paper tray. When the memory is full the machine will stop automatically answering calls. To print the faxes, put fresh paper in the tray.

4

Fax Forwarding

The Fax Forwarding feature lets you automatically forward your received faxes to another machine. If you choose Backup Print

On, the machine will also print the fax.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Forward/Store

.

Press Forward/Store.

e

Press Fax Forward.

f

Do one of the followings:

 Press Manual to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) or E-mail address (up to

60 characters) using the buttons on the Touchscreen. (See Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic User's

Guide.)

Press OK.

Press Address Book.

Press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or E-mail address you want your faxes to be forward to.

Press the fax number or E-mail address you want to use.

4

4

25

Chapter 4

Note

• You can enter an E-mail address by pressing on the Touchscreen.

• You can display your stored numbers and

E-mail addresses in alphabetical order by

• You cannot enter a forwarding number using a One Touch key on the control panel.

• Depending on the E-mail address you choose, you will be asked for the File

Type. Choose TIFF or PDF and go to

step g.

• If you choose a Group number from the

Address Book, the faxes will be forwarded to multiple fax numbers.

g

Press Backup Print:On or

Backup Print:Off

.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.

This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.

h

Press Stop/Exit.

Fax Storage

The Fax Storage feature lets you store your received faxes in the machine’s memory. You can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax machine at another location using the remote

retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax

messages on page 30.) Your machine will

automatically print a copy of the stored fax.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Forward/Store

.

Press Forward/Store.

e

Press Fax Storage.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

4

26

PC-Fax Receive

If you turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature your machine will store received faxes in memory and send them to your PC automatically. You can then use your PC to view and store these faxes.

Even if you have turned off your PC (at night or the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory. The number of received faxes that are stored in the memory will appear on the

LCD.

When you start your PC and the PC-Fax

Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.

To transfer the received faxes to your PC you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX

Receiving in the Software User's Guide.) a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Forward/Store

.

Press Forward/Store.

e

Press PC Fax Receive.

f

The LCD gives you options that you have set up in the PC-Fax receiving program on your PC. If you started the

PC-FAX Receiving program on your computer, press OK. (See PC-FAX

Receiving in the Software User's

Guide.) g

Press a or b to choose <USB> or your computer name if the machine is connected to a network.

Press OK.

4

Receiving a fax h

Press Backup Print:On or

Backup Print:Off

.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print the fax at your machine so you will have a copy. This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.

4

Note

• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive you must install the MFL-Pro Suite software on your PC. Make sure your PC is connected and turned on. (For details see PC-FAX Receiving in the Software

User's Guide.)

• If your machine has a problem and is unable to print faxes in memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to a

PC. (For details, see Transferring your

faxes or Fax Journal report in Appendix B of the Basic User's Guide.)

• PC-Fax Receive is not supported in

Mac OS.

• Even if you have turned on the PC-Fax

Receive feature, colour faxes will not be transferred to your PC. The machine prints received colour faxes.

27

Chapter 4

Changing Remote Fax

Options

If received faxes are left in your machine’s memory when you change to another

Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you one of the following questions:

Erase All Doc?

Print All Fax?

• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be erased or printed before the setting changes. If a backup copy has already been printed it will not be printed again.

• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or printed and the setting will be unchanged.

If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to

PC Fax Receive

from another remote fax option (Fax Forward or Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the following question:

Send Fax to PC?

• If you press Yes, faxes in the memory will be sent to your PC before the setting changes.

• If you press No, faxes in the memory will not be erased or transferred to your

PC and the setting will be unchanged.

Backup Print:On

Backup Print:Off

Press Backup Print:On or

Backup Print:Off

.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the machine will also print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.

This is a safety feature in case there is a power failure before the fax is forwarded or a problem at the receiving machine.

4

Turning off Remote Fax Options

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Forward/Store

.

Press Forward/Store.

e

Press Off.

Note

The LCD will give you more options if there are received faxes still in your

machine’s memory. (See Changing

Remote Fax Options on page 28.)

f

Press Stop/Exit.

4

28

Remote retrieval

The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve your stored fax messages when you are not at the machine. You can call your machine from any touch tone phone or fax machine, then use the Remote Access Code to retrieve your messages.

4

Setting a Remote Access Code

The Remote Access Code feature lets you access the remote retrieval features when you are away from your machine. Before you use the remote access and retrieval features, you have to set up your own code. The default code is the inactive code: – – –l.

4

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Remote Access

.

Press Remote Access.

d

Enter a three-digit code using the numbers 0 – 9, l or #.

Press OK.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

DO NOT use the same code used for your

Remote Activation code (l51) or Remote

Deactivation code (#51).(See Using

Remote Codes in Chapter 6 of the Basic

User's Guide.)

You can change your code at any time. If you want to make your code inactive, press

Clear

and OK in d to restore the default

setting – – –l.

Receiving a fax

Using your Remote Access Code

a

Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.

4

b

When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access

Code c

The machine signals if it has received messages:

No beeps

No messages received.

1 long beep

Fax message received.

d

The machine gives two short beeps to tell you to enter a command. The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds before entering a command. If you enter an invalid command the machine will beep three times.

e

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you have finished.

f

Hang up.

Note

If your machine is set to Manual mode, you can still access the remote retrieval features. Dial the fax number as normal and let the machine ring. After

100 seconds you will hear a long beep to tell you to enter the remote access code.

You will then have 30 seconds to enter the code.

4

29

Chapter 4

Retrieving fax messages

a

Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.

4

b

When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access

Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.

c

When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 6 2.

d

Wait for a long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent, followed by ##

(up to 20 digits).

e

Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other machine, which will then print your fax messages.

Note

You can insert a pause in a fax number by using the # key.

Changing the Fax Forwarding number

4

You can change the default setting of your fax forwarding number from another telephone or fax machine using touch tone dialling.

a

Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone dialling.

b

When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access

Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.

c

When you hear two short beeps, use the dial pad to press 9 5 4.

d

Wait for a long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the new number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages forwarded followed by ## (up to 20 digits).

e

Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you have finished.

f

Hang up after you hear your machine beep.

Note

You can insert a pause in a fax number by using the # key.

30

Receiving a fax

Remote fax commands

Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.

4

Remote commands

95

Change the fax forwarding or fax storage settings

1 OFF

96

97

98

90

Operation details

2 Fax Forwarding

4 Fax Forwarding number

6 Fax Storage

You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your messages.

One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot change because the conditions have not been met (for example, registering a fax forwarding number). You can register the maximum number of rings. (See

Changing the Fax Forwarding number on page 30.) Once you

have registered the number, fax forwarding will work.

Retrieve a fax

2 Retrieve all faxes

3 Erase faxes from the memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from the memory.

Check the receiving status

Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax

messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 30.)

1 Fax You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.

If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three short beeps.

Change the Receive Mode

1 External TAD

2 Fax/Tel

If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.

3 Fax Only

Exit

Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then replace the handset.

4

31

Chapter 4

Additional receiving operations

Printing a reduced incoming fax

4

If you choose On, the machine automatically reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size paper.

The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and your Paper

Size setting (MENU, General Setup,

Tray Setting

, Tray Use:Fax). See

Paper Size and Type in Chapter 2 of the

Basic User's Guide.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Auto Reduction

.

Press Auto Reduction.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

4

Duplex (2-sided) printing for

Fax mode

4

Your machine can automatically print received faxes onto both sides of the paper when Duplex is set to On.

You can use A4 size paper for this function

(60 to 105 g/m

2

).

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Duplex.

Press Duplex.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

• When Duplex is turned on incoming faxes will automatically be reduced to fit the size of paper in the paper tray.

• When Duplex is set to On, the LCD displays

1 2

(Duplex icon).

32

Setting the Fax Receive

Stamp (black & white only)

You can set the machine to print the received date and time in the top centre of each received fax page.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display Fax Rx Stamp.

Press Fax Rx Stamp.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

Note

• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.

• Make sure you have set the current date and time in the machine. (See the Quick

Setup Guide.)

4

Receiving a fax

Setting the Print Density

You can adjust the Print Density setting to make your printed pages darker or lighter.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Setup Receive

.

Press Setup Receive.

d

Press a or b to display

Print Density

.

Press Print Density.

e

Press c to make the print darker.

Or, press d to make the print lighter.

Press OK.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

4

4

33

Chapter 4

Printing a fax from the memory

If you are using the Fax Storage feature

(MENU, Fax, Setup Receive,

Forward/Store

), you can still print a fax from the memory when you are at your

machine. (See Fax Storage on page 26.)

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Print Document

.

Press Print Document.

d

Press Mono Start.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

4

34

Polling overview

Polling lets you set up your machine so other people can receive faxes from you, but they pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it, so you pay for the call. The polling feature needs to be set up on both machines for this to work. Not all fax machines support polling.

4

Polling receive

Polling receive lets you call another fax machine to receive a fax.

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Polling RX.

Press Polling RX.

c

Press Standard.

d

Enter the fax number you are polling using One Touch, Speed Dial, or the dial pad. Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

4

Secure polling

Secure polling lets you restrict who can get the documents you set up to be polled.

Secure polling only works with Brother fax machines. If you want to get a fax from a secured Brother machine you have to enter the secure code.

4

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Polling RX.

Press Polling RX.

c

Press Secure.

d

Enter a four-digit number.

Press OK.

e

Enter the fax number you are polling.

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Receiving a fax

Delayed polling

Delayed polling lets you set the machine to begin polling receive at a later time. You can only set up one delayed polling operation.

4

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Polling RX.

Press Polling RX.

c

Press Timer.

d

Enter the time (in 24-hour format) you want to begin polling.

For example, enter 21:45 for 9:45 PM.

Press OK.

e

Enter the fax number you are polling.

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

The machine makes the polling call at the time you entered.

4

Sequential polling

Sequential polling lets you request documents from several fax machines in one operation.

4

a

Press b

Press d or c to display Polling RX.

Press Polling RX.

c

Press Standard, Secure or Timer.

d

Choose one of the options below.

If you choose Standard go to

step e.

 If you choose Secure, enter a four-digit number, press OK, go to

step e.

 If you chose Timer, enter the time

(in 24-hours format) you want to begin polling and press OK, go to

step e.

e

Press d or c to display Broadcasting.

Press Broadcasting.

35

Chapter 4 f

Do one of the following:

 Press Manual and enter a number by pressing the buttons on the

Touchscreen.

Press OK.

 Press Address Book. Press to choose Alphabetical Order or

Numerical Order. Press a or b to select a number.

Press OK.

Note

One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.

Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

g

After you have entered all the fax

numbers by repeating step f, press OK.

h

Press Mono Start.

The machine polls each number or

Group number in turn for a document.

Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling to cancel the polling process.

To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,

see Cancelling a Sequential Polling Job on page 36.

Cancelling a Sequential Polling Job

a

Press Stop/Exit.

b

Do one of the following:

 To cancel the entire sequential polling job, press

Entire Seq. Poll

. Go to step c.

 To cancel the current job, press the button that displays the number

being dialled. Go to step d.

To exit without cancelling, press

Stop/Exit.

4

c

When the LCD asks if you want to cancel the entire sequential polling job, do one of the following:

 Press Yes to confirm.

 To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.

d

Do one of the following:

 To cancel the current job, press Yes.

 To exit without cancelling, press No or Stop/Exit.

36

5

Dialling and storing numbers

5

Telephone line services

BT Call Sign (U.K. only)

The BT Call Sign subscriber service is a way to have a separate number for your machine, it allows you to have at least two separate telephone numbers on one phone line. Each phone number has its own distinctive ringing pattern.

You can set up your machine so that it only responds to the second number.

When you set the BT Call Sign feature to ON, the receive mode is set to Manual automatically. Manual mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, since the number you use for telephone calls will use the normal ring pattern. If you turn the feature off, your receive mode will remain on

Manual

.

5

To enable the machine to work with BT

Call Sign

5

This feature will only work with your external phone.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Miscellaneous

.

Press Miscellaneous.

d

Press BT Call Sign.

e

Press On or Off.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

5

Additional dialling operations

5

Combining quick dial numbers

Sometimes you may want to choose from several long distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long distance carriers and credit card numbers as

One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate One Touch and Speed Dial numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad.

See Storing numbers in Chapter 7 of the

Basic User's Guide.

For example, you might have stored ‘555’ in

Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ in Speed Dial

#002. You can use them both to dial

‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:

Press Address Book, #003 and

Send a fax

.

Press Address Book, #002, Send a fax and Mono Start or Colour Start.

Numbers can be added manually by entering them on the dial pad:

Press Address Book, #003, Send a fax,

7001 (on the dial pad), and Mono Start or

Colour Start.

This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add a pause by pressing Redial/Pause.

5

5

37

Chapter 5

Additional ways to store numbers

Setting up Groups for

Broadcasting

If you often want to send the same fax message to many fax numbers you can set up a Group.

Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a

Speed Dial number. Each Group uses up a

One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You can then send the fax message to all the numbers stored in a Group just by pressing a

One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial number, and then pressing Mono Start.

Before you can add numbers to a Group, you need to store them as One Touch or Speed

Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small

Groups, or you can assign up to 339 numbers to one large Group.

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Press Setup Groups.

d

Press Set Speed Dial or

Set One Touch Dial

which you want to store the new Group to.

Note

The machine automatically allocates an available Speed Dial number or One

Touch Dial location to the new Group.

e

Enter the Group name (up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen. Use the chart on

Entering text in Appendix C of the Basic

User's Guide to help you enter letters.

Press OK.

f

Enter the Group number by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

5

5

38

g

To select the telecommunication medium and the file type, press d or c to display

Fax/IFAX

,

E-Mail B&W PDF

,

E-Mail B&W TIFF

,

E-Mail Color PDF

,

E-Mail Color JPEG

,

E-Mail Color XPS

,

E-Mail Gray PDF

,

E-Mail Gray JPEG

or

E-Mail Gray XPS

.

Press the option you want.

h

Add One Touch or Speed Dial numbers to the Group by pressing the check box to display a red check mark.

If you want to list the numbers in alphabetical order, press

Press OK.

.

Note

• One Touch Dial numbers begin with l.

Speed Dial numbers begin with #.

• If the stored telecommunication medium of a One Touch Dial number or a Speed

Dial number is not compatible with the telecommunication medium selected in

step g, the One Touch Dial number or

Speed Dial number will be dimmed on the

LCD.

i

To choose the fax/scan resolution for the Group number, go to the appropriate next step as shown in the following table.

Option selected in step g

Fax/IFAX

E-Mail Color PDF

E-Mail Color JPEG

E-Mail Color XPS

E-Mail Gray PDF

E-Mail Gray JPEG

E-Mail Gray XPS

E-Mail B&W PDF

E-Mail B&W TIFF

Go to step

j k l m

j

Select the resolution from Standard,

Fine

, S.Fine

1

or Photo and go to step o.

1

S.Fine

is available if the Group is constituted by only fax numbers.

k

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

, 300 dpi or 600 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Color PDF,

go to step n.

 If you chose E-Mail Color JPEG or E-Mail Color XPS, go to

step o.

l

Select the resolution from 100 dpi,

200 dpi

or 300 dpi.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray PDF, go

to step n.

 If you chose E-Mail Gray JPEG or

E-Mail Gray XPS

, go to step o.

m

Select the resolution from 200 dpi or

200 x 100 dpi

.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W PDF, go

to step n.

 If you chose E-Mail B&W TIFF, go

to step o.

Dialling and storing numbers n

Select the PDF type from PDF, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

or Signed PDF that will be used to send E-mail.

Note

If you choose Secure PDF, the machine will ask you to enter a four-digit password using the numbers 0-9 before it starts scanning.

o

Press OK to confirm.

p

Press Stop/Exit.

5

39

Chapter 5

Options for Setting Up Groups

The following chart shows the selections for setting up Group numbers.

When you store numbers, the LCD instructs you to choose from the options shown in the following steps.

5

Step 1

Enter

Group

Location

One

Touch or

Speed

Dial

Step 2

Enter

Group

Name

(Name)

Press OK

Step 3

Enter

Name

Step 4

Select

Registration

Type

(1 to 40) Fax/IFAX

E-Mail

Color PDF

E-Mail

Color JPEG

E-Mail

Color XPS

E-Mail

Gray PDF

E-Mail

Gray JPEG

E-Mail

Gray XPS

E-Mail

B&W PDF

E-Mail

B&W TIFF

Step 5

Add Stored

One Touch and Speed

Dial Numbers to the Group

Fax Number or

E-mail

Address

E-mail

Address

Step 6

Select Resolution

Standard

, Fine,

S.Fine

1

, Photo

-

Step 7

Select File

Type

100 dpi

300 dpi

, 200 dpi,

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

, 600 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

-

-

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

-

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

100 dpi

, 200 dpi,

300 dpi

200 dpi

,

200 x 100 dpi

-

200 dpi

,

200 x 100 dpi

-

PDF

, PDF/A,

Secure PDF

,

Signed PDF

1

S.Fine does not appear if you add an E-mail address in step 5.

Note

• If you choose Signed PDF, you must install a certificate to your machine using Web Based

Management. Choose Configure Signed PDF Settings from Administrator Settings in Web

Based Management. For how to install a certificate, see the Network User's Guide.

• PDF/A is a PDF file format intended for long-term archiving. This format contains all the necessary information to be able to reproduce the document after long-term storage.

• A Signed PDF helps prevent data tampering and the impersonation of an author by including a digital certificate within the document.

40

Changing Group numbers

You can change a Group number that has already been stored. If the Group has a fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the

LCD. You cannot select the number to make changes.

5

Changing a Group name, Resolution or

PDF type

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Press Change.

d

Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.

Press the Group.

e

Do one of the following:

If you chose Name, enter the name

(up to 15 characters) by pressing the buttons on the Touchscreen.

Press OK.

 If you chose Resolution, press one of the available resolution options displayed on the LCD.

 If you chose PDF type, press one of the available file type options displayed on the LCD.

The LCD will display your new setting.

Note

How to change the stored name or number:

If you want to change a character, press d or c to position the cursor under the character you want to change, and then press . Re-enter the character.

f

Press OK.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

Dialling and storing numbers

Adding and deleting numbers in a Group

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Press Change.

d

Press a or b to display the Group you want to change.

Press the Group.

e

Press Add/Delete.

f

Press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.

g

Press the check box of the number you want to add to check it.

Press the check box of the number you want to delete to uncheck it.

Press OK to confirm.

h

Press OK.

i

Press Stop/Exit.

5

41

Chapter 5

Deleting Group numbers

You can delete a Group number that has already been stored. If a Group has a scheduled job or fax forwarding number, it will be dimmed on the LCD. You cannot select the number to delete it.

a

Press Address Book.

b

Press More.

c

Press Delete.

d

Press a or b to display the Group you want to delete.

Press the check box of the Group you want to delete to check it.

Press OK.

e

Do one of the following:

 To Delete the Group, press Yes.

 To exit without deleting the Group, press No.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

5

42

6

Printing reports

6

Fax reports

Some fax reports (transmission verification and fax journal) can be printed automatically and manually.

6

Transmission verification report

You can use the Transmission Verification

Report as proof that you sent a fax. (For details about how to set up the type of report you want, see Transmission Verification

Report in Chapter 4 of the Basic User's

Guide.)

6

Fax Journal

You can set the machine to print a fax journal

(activity report) at specific intervals (every

50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this means that your machine will print the journal when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

If you set the interval to Off, you can still print the report by following the steps on the next page.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display Fax.

Press Fax.

c

Press a or b to display

Report Settings

.

Press Report Settings.

d

Press Journal Period.

6

e

Press d or c to choose an interval

 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days

The machine will print the report at the chosen time and then erase all jobs from its memory.

If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 jobs before the time you chose has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the jobs from the memory.

 Every 50 Faxes

The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

f

Do one of the following:

 If you chose Every 50 Faxes

Go to step g.

 If you chose Every 6, 12, 24 hours or

2 Days

Enter the time to start printing in

24-hour format. (For example: enter

19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

Press OK.

 If you chose Every 7 Days

Enter the time to start printing in

24-hour format. (For example: enter

19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

Press OK.

Press d or c to choose the day of the week.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

6

43

Chapter 6

Reports

The following reports are available:

1 XMIT Verify

Displays the Transmission Verification

Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes and prints the last report.

2 Help List

Prints a list of commonly used functions to help you program your machine.

3 Tel Index List

Prints a list of names and numbers stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory in numerical or alphabetical order.

4 Fax Journal

Prints a list of information about your last

200 incoming and outgoing faxes.

(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)

5 User Settings

Print a list of your current settings.

6 Network Config

Lists your network settings.

7 Drum Dot Print

Prints the drum dot check sheet to troubleshoot a dotted print problem.

8 WLAN Report

Prints the result of wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.

9 Order Form

You can print an accessories order form to fill out and send to your Brother dealer.

6

How to print a report

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Print Reports

.

Press Print Reports.

c

Press a or b to display the report you want to print.

Press the report you want to print.

d

Do one of the followings:

 If you chose XMIT Verify, press

Print Report

.

 If you chose Tel Index List, press Numerical Order or

Alphabetical Order

.

 If you chose other than XMIT

Verify

or Tel Index List, go

to e.

e

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

f

Press Stop/Exit.

6

44

7

Making copies

7

Copy settings

You can change the copy settings temporarily for the next copy.

These settings are temporary, and the machine returns to its default settings one minute after copying, unless you have set the

Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less. (See

Mode Timer on page 4.)

To change a setting, press (COPY) and then press d or c to scroll through the copy settings. When the setting you want is displayed, press the button.

When you are finished choosing settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start.

7

Stop copying

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

7

Improving copy quality

You can choose from a range of quality settings. The default setting is Auto.

Auto

Auto is the recommended mode for ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents that contain both text and photographs.

Text

Suitable for documents containing mainly text.

Photo

Better copy quality for photographs.

Graph

Suitable for copying receipts.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Quality.

Press Quality.

e

Press Auto, Text, Photo or Graph.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

7

7

45

Chapter 7

Enlarging or reducing the image copied

To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the instructions below: a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display

Enlarge/Reduce

.

Press Enlarge/Reduce.

e

Press 100%, Enlarge, Reduce or

Custom(25-400%)

.

f

Do one of the following:

 If you chose Enlarge or Reduce, press the enlargement or reduction ratio button you want.

 If you chose Custom(25-400%), enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from 25% to 400%.

Press OK.

If you chose 100%, go to step g.

7

100%

*

104% EXE i LTR

141% A5 i A4

200%

50%

70% A4 i A5

78% LGL i LTR

83% LGL i A4

85% LTR i EXE

91% Full Page

94% A4 i LTR

97% LTR i A4

Custom(25-400%) g

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Note

Page Layout Options 2 in 1 (P), 2 in 1 (L),

2 in 1 (ID), 4 in 1 (P) and 4 in 1 (L) are not available with Enlarge/Reduce.

46

Duplex (2-sided) Copying

If you want to use the automatic duplex copy feature, load your document in the ADF.

If you get an Out of Memory message while you are making duplex copies, try installing

extra memory. (See Installing extra memory on page 67.)

You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start duplex copying. The layout of your document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.

2sidei2side

Portrait

11 11

7

2 2

Landscape

1

2

1sidei2side Long Edge Flip

Portrait

11

2

1

2

2

Landscape

1

2

2

Making copies

2sidei1side Long Edge Flip

Portrait

11

1

Landscape

2 2

2

1sidei2side Short Edge Flip

Portrait

11

1

2

Landscape

2

1

2

1

2

2sidei1side Short Edge Flip

Portrait

11

2

1

2

2

Landscape

1

2

2 a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

47

7

Chapter 7 d

Press d or c to display Duplex Copy.

Press Duplex Copy.

e

Press d or c to display the following layout options:

2sidei2side

,

1sidei2side LongEdgeFlip

,

2sidei1side LongEdgeFlip

,

1sidei2side ShortEdgeFlip

,

2sidei1side ShortEdgeFlip

,

Off

Press the option you want.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Tray selection

You can temporarily change the Tray Use option for the next copy.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Tray Use.

Press Tray Use.

e

Press MP>T1, MP>T1>T2

1

, T1>MP,

T1>T2>MP

1

, Tray#1 Only,

Tray#2 Only

1

or MP Only.

1

T2

and Tray#2 Only appears only if the optional lower tray is installed.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Note

To change the default setting for Tray

Use, see Tray Use in copy mode in

Chapter 2 of the Basic User's Guide.

7

Adjusting Brightness and

Contrast

Brightness

Adjust the copy brightness to make copies darker or lighter.

7

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Brightness.

Press Brightness.

e

Press d to make a darker copy or press c

to make a lighter copy.

Press OK.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Contrast

Adjust the contrast to help an image look sharper and more vivid.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Contrast.

Press Contrast.

e

Press d to decrease the contrast or press c to increase the contrast.

Press OK.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

7

7

48

Sorting copies using the ADF

7

You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so on.

a

Press b

Load your document in the ADF.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Stack / Sort.

Press Stack / Sort.

e

Press Sort.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Note

Sort is available only when the document is in the ADF.

Making copies

Making N in 1 copies

(page layout)

You can reduce the amount of paper used when copying by using the N in 1 copy feature. This allows you to copy two or four pages onto one page. If you want to copy both sides of an ID card onto one page, see

2 in 1 ID Copy on page 51.

IMPORTANT

• Please make sure the paper size is set to

Letter

, A4, Legal or Folio.

• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce setting with the N in 1 feature.

• (P) means Portrait and (L) means

Landscape.

7

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Page Layout.

Press Page Layout.

e

Press d or c to display Off(1in1),

2in1(P)

, 2in1(L), 2in1(ID)

1

,

4in1(P)

or 4in1(L).

Press the button you want.

1

For details about 2in1(ID), see 2 in 1 ID

Copy on page 51.

f

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start to scan the page.

If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.

If you are using the scanner glass, go

to step g.

g

After the machine scans the page, press

Yes

to scan the next page.

7

49

Chapter 7 h

Put the next page on the scanner glass.

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

Repeat steps g and h for each page of

the layout.

i

After all the pages have been scanned,

press No in step g to finish.

If you are copying from the ADF:

Insert your document face up in the direction shown below:

7

2 in 1 (P)

2 in 1 (L)

If you are copying from the scanner glass:

Insert your document face down in the direction shown below:

2 in 1 (P)

7

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

50

2 in 1 ID Copy

You can copy both sides of your identification card onto one page, keeping the original card size.

7

Note

You can copy an identification card to the extent permitted under applicable laws.

See Unlawful use of copying equipment in the Safety and Legal Booklet.

a

Press b

Place your identification card face down on the left side of the scanner glass.

Making copies h

Press Mono Start or Colour Start. The machine scans the other side of the card and prints the page.

Note

When 2 in 1 ID Copy is chosen, the machine sets the quality to Photo and the contrast to +2.

7

 Even if a document is placed on the

ADF, the machine scans the data from the scanner glass.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Page Layout.

Press Page Layout.

e

Press d or c to display 2in1(ID).

Press 2in1(ID).

f

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

After the machine scans the first side of the card, the LCD will display Turn over the ID Card Then Press

Start

.

g

Turn over your identification card and place it on the left side of the scanner glass.

51

Chapter 7

Adjusting Colour (Saturation)

7

You can change the default setting for colour saturation.

a

Press b

Load your document.

c

Enter the number of copies you want.

d

Press d or c to display Color Adjust.

Press Color Adjust.

e

Press Red, Green or Blue.

f

Press d to decrease or c to increase the colour saturation.

Press OK.

g

Repeat steps e and f if you want to

adjust the next colour. Press .

h

If you do not want to change additional settings, press Mono Start or

Colour Start.

Setting your changes as the new default

7

You can save the copy settings for Quality,

Brightness

, Contrast and

Color Adjust

you use most often by setting them as the default. These settings will stay until you change them again.

a

Press b

Press d or c to choose the setting you want to change, and then press the new option.

Repeat this step for each setting you want to change.

c

After changing the last setting, press d or c to display Set New Default.

Press Set New Default.

d

Press Yes.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

Restoring all copy settings to the factory settings

7

You can restore all the copy settings you have changed to the factory settings. These settings will stay until you change them again.

a

Press b

After changing the last setting, press d or c to display Factory Reset.

Press Factory Reset.

c

Press Yes.

d

Press Stop/Exit.

52

Setting your favourites

You can store the copy settings that you use most often by setting them as a favourite. You can set up to three favourites.

a

Press b

Choose the copy option and settings you want to store.

c

Press d or c to display

Favorite Settings

.

Press Favorite Settings.

d

Press Store.

e

Press the location where you want to store your setting for Favorite:1,

Favorite:2

or Favorite:3.

f

Do one of the following:

If you want to rename your setting, press to delete characters. Then enter the new name (up to 12 characters). Press OK.

 If you do not want to rename your setting, press OK.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

7

Retrieving your favourite setting

When you are ready to use one of your favourite set of settings, you can recall it.

a

Press b

Press Favorite.

c

Press the favourite setting you want to retrieve.

d

Press Mono Start or Colour Start.

7

Making copies

Rename your favourite setting

After you stored your favourite setting, you can rename it.

7

a

Press b

Press d or c to display

Favorite Settings

.

Press Favorite Settings.

c

Press Rename.

d

Press the favourite setting you want to rename.

e

Enter the new name (up to 12 characters).

f

Press OK.

g

Press Stop/Exit.

7

53

54

A

Routine maintenance

Cleaning and checking the machine

A

Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure that you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.

WARNING

DO NOT use cleaning materials that contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of spray, or any type of flammable substance to clean the outside or inside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

See To use the product safely in the Safety

and Legal Booklet for how to clean the machine.

Checking the Page Counters

A

You can see the machine’s Page Counters for copies, printed pages, reports and lists, faxes or a summary total.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Machine Info.

.

Press Machine Info..

c

Press Page Counter.

The LCD shows number of pages for

Total

, Fax/List, Copy or Print.

d

Press Total, Fax/List, Copy or

Print

to see the page counters for

Colour and Black & White.

e

Do one of the following:

 To see the other options, press

 To exit, press Stop/Exit.

.

A

Be careful not to inhale toner.

IMPORTANT

Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine will damage the surface of the machine.

Checking the remaining life of parts

A

You can see the machine’s parts life on the

LCD.

a

Press MENU.

b

Press a or b to display

Machine Info.

.

Press Machine Info..

c

Press Parts Life.

d

Press a or b to see the approximate remaining parts life of the Drum,

Belt Unit

, Fuser, Laser,

PF Kit MP

, PF Kit 1 and

PF Kit 2

.

e

Press Stop/Exit.

Routine maintenance

Replacing periodic maintenance parts

The periodic maintenance parts will need to be replaced regularly to maintain the print quality. The parts listed below will have to be replaced after printing approximately 50,000 pages

1

for PF Kit MP and 100,000 pages

for PF Kit 1, PF Kit 2, Fuser and Laser.

Please call your Brother dealer when the

1

following messages appear on the LCD.

1

A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

A

LCD message

Replace Parts

Fuser Unit

Replace Parts

Laser Unit

Replace Parts

PF Kit 1

Replace Parts

PF Kit 2

Replace Parts

PF Kit MP

Description

Replace the fuser unit.

Replace the laser unit.

Replace the paper feeding kit for the paper tray.

Replace the paper feeding kit for the lower tray

(option).

Replace the paper feeding kit for the multi-purpose tray.

A

55

Packing and shipping the machine

A

WARNING

This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 28.5 kg. To prevent possible injuries at least two people should lift the machine. Be careful not to pinch your fingers when you put the machine down.

Note

If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.

Make sure that you have the following parts for repacking:

1

3

2

If you use a Lower Tray, carry it separately from your machine.

IMPORTANT

When shipping the machine, the waste toner box must be removed from the machine and put in a plastic bag, and then sealed. Failure to remove it and put it in a plastic bag before shipping may cause severe damage to the machine and may void the warranty.

1 Plastic bag for the waste toner box

2 Orange packing materials for locking the internal parts (4 pieces)

3 A piece of paper (A4 or Letter) to protect the belt unit (Please supply this yourself)

56

a

Turn off the machine. Unplug the telephone line cord first, disconnect all cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

b

Press the front cover release button and then open the front cover.

Routine maintenance c

Hold the green handle of the drum unit.

Pull the drum unit out until it stops.

A

57

d

Turn the green lock lever (1) at the left of the machine anticlockwise to the release position. Holding the green handles of the drum unit, lift the front of the drum unit and remove it from the machine.

1

IMPORTANT

• Hold the green handles of the drum unit when you carry it. DO NOT hold the sides of the drum unit.

• We recommend that you place the drum unit on a clean, flat surface with a piece of disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• Handle the toner cartridge and the waste toner box carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

• To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.

58

e

Hold the green handle of the belt unit with both hands and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

Routine maintenance f

Remove the two pieces of orange packing material and discard them.

Note

This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to protect your machine during shipment from the factory.

A

59

g

Remove the waste toner box from the machine using the green handle, and then put it in a plastic bag and seal the bag completely.

h

Put the belt unit back into the machine.

Make sure the belt unit is level and fits firmly into place.

IMPORTANT

Handle the waste toner box carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.

60

Routine maintenance i

Install orange packing materials to the drum unit as follows:

 To secure the toner cartridges, install the matching orange packing strips

(1) (marked L and R) to the drum unit on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustration.

 Attach the orange packing strip (2) to the left side of the drum unit, as shown in the illustration.

 Slide the small orange packing material (3) onto the metal shaft on the right side of the drum unit, as shown in the illustration.

2

1 L

1 R

A

3

61

j

Put a piece of paper (A4 or Letter) on the belt unit to prevent damage to the belt unit.

l

Match the guide ends (2) of the drum unit to the c marks (1) on both sides of the machine, then gently slide the drum unit into the machine until it stops at the green lock lever.

1

2

k

Make sure the green lock lever (1) is in the release position as shown in the illustration.

m

Turn the green lock lever (1) clockwise to the lock position.

1

1

62

n

Push the drum unit in until it stops.

Routine maintenance p

Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the lower carton (1). Then put the waste toner box in the Styrofoam piece.

FRONT

2

1 q

Wrap the machine with a plastic bag.

Put the machine on the Styrofoam piece

(1).

A

o

Close the front cover of the machine.

1

FRONT

63

r

Put the Styrofoam piece (2) into the back side of Styrofoam piece (1) as shown in the illustration.

2 s

Place the upper carton (1) over the machine and the lower carton (2). Align the joint holes of the upper carton with the joint holes of the lower carton.

Secure the upper carton to the lower carton using the four plastic joints (3) as shown in the illustration.

1

3

1

3

2

3

64

t

Put the two Styrofoam pieces (1) into the carton matching the right of the machine to the "RIGHT" mark on one of the

Styrofoam pieces, and the left of the machine to the "LEFT" mark on the other Styrofoam piece. Put the AC power cord and printed materials in the original carton as shown in the illustration.

1

LEFT

1

RIGHT

Routine maintenance

A

u

Close the carton and tape it shut.

65

B

Options

Optional paper tray

(LT-300CL)

An optional lower tray can be installed, and it can hold up to 500 sheets of 80 g/m

2

paper.

When an optional tray is installed, the machine can hold up to 800 sheets of plain paper.

B

For setup, see the Instructions that we have supplied with the lower tray unit.

Memory board

MFC-9970CDW has 256 MB of standard memory. The machine has one slot for optional memory expansion. You can increase the memory up to maximum of

512 MB by installing one SO-DIMM (Small

Outline Dual In-line Memory Module).

SO-DIMM Types

B

B

You can install the following SO-DIMMs:

 128 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/128

256 MB Kingston KTH-LJ2015/256

 128 MB Transcend TS128MHP422A

 256 MB Transcend TS256MHP423A

Note

• For more information, visit the Kingston

Technology website at http://www.kingston.com/.

• For more information, visit the Transcend website at http://www.transcend.com.tw/.

In general, the SO-DIMM must have the following specifications:

Type: 144-pin and 16-bit output

CAS latency: 4

Clock frequency: 267 MHz (533 Mb/S/Pin) or more

Capacity: 64, 128 or 256 MB

Height: 30.0 mm (1.18 in.)

DRAM type: DDR2 SDRAM

Note

• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will not work with the machine.

• For more information, call the dealer you bought the machine from or Brother

Customer Service.

66

B

Installing extra memory

a

Turn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord.

b

Disconnect the interface cable from the machine, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

Note

Be sure to turn off the machine’s power switch before you install or remove the

SO-DIMM.

c

Remove the plastic (1) and then metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.

2

1

B

Options e

Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and align the notches in the SO-DIMM with the protrusions in the slot. Insert the

SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it toward the interface board until it clicks into place (2).

1 2 f

Put the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)

SO-DIMM covers back on.

1

B

d

Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its edges.

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the memory chips or the board surface.

2 g

Plug the machine’s power cord back into the electrical socket first, and then connect the interface cable.

67

h

Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on the machine’s power switch.

Note

To make sure that you have installed the

SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user settings page that shows the current

memory size. (See How to print a report on page 44.)

68

C

Glossary

C

This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of these features depends on the model you purchased.

ADF (automatic document feeder)

The document can be placed in the ADF and scanned one page at a time automatically.

Auto Reduction

Reduces the size of incoming faxes.

Automatic fax transmission

Sending a fax without picking up the handset of the external telephone.

Automatic Redial

A feature that enables your machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes if the fax did not go through because the line was busy.

Backup Print

Your machine prints a copy of every fax that is received and stored in memory.

This is a safety feature so you will not lose messages during a power failure.

Batch Transmission

As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes to the same fax number will be sent as one transmission.

Beeper Volume

Volume setting for the beep when you press a key or make an error.

Broadcasting

The ability to send the same fax message to more than one location.

BT Call Sign

A subscriber service purchased from the telephone company in U.K. that gives you another phone number on an existing phone line. The Brother machine uses the new number to simulate a dedicated fax line.

Cancel Job

Cancels a programmed print job and clears the machine’s memory.

CNG tones

The special tones (beeps) sent by fax machines during automatic transmission to tell the receiving machine that a fax machine is calling.

Coding method

Method of coding the information contained in the document. All fax machines must use a minimum standard of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine is capable of greater compression methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified

Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the receiving machine has the same capability.

Communication error (or Comm. Error)

An error during fax sending or receiving, usually caused by line noise or static.

Compatibility group

The ability of one fax unit to communicate with another. Compatibility is assured between ITU-T Groups.

Contrast

Setting to compensate for dark or light documents, by making faxes or copies of dark documents lighter and light documents darker.

Delayed Fax

Sends your fax at a specified later time that day.

Dual Access

Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or scheduled jobs into memory at the same time it is sending a fax or receiving or printing an incoming fax.

C

69

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

Detects errors during fax transmission and resends the pages of the fax that had an error.

Extension telephone

A telephone on the fax number that is plugged into a separate wall socket.

External phone

A TAD (telephone answering device) or telephone that is connected to your machine.

F/T Ring Time

The length of time that the Brother machine fast double-rings (when the

Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify you to pick up a voice call that it answered.

Fax Detect

Enables your machine to respond to CNG tones if you interrupt a fax call by answering it.

Fax Forwarding

Sends a fax received into the memory to another pre-programmed fax number.

Fax Journal

Lists information about the last

200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.

Fax Storage

You can store faxes in the memory.

Fax tones

The signals sent by sending and receiving fax machines while communicating information.

Fax/Tel

You can receive faxes and telephone calls. Do not use this mode if you are using a telephone answering device

(TAD).

Fine resolution

Resolution is 203

× 196 dpi. It is used for small print and graphs.

Greyscale

The shades of grey available for copying and faxing photographs.

Group number

A combination of One Touch and

Speed Dial numbers that are stored on an

One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location for Broadcasting.

Help List

A printout of the complete Menu table that you can use to program your machine when you do not have the User’s Guides with you.

Journal Period

The pre-programmed time period between automatically printed Fax

Journal Reports. You can print the Fax

Journal on demand without interrupting the cycle.

LCD (liquid crystal display)

The display screen on the machine that shows interactive messages during

On-Screen Programming and shows the date and time when the machine is idle.

Manual fax

When you lift the handset of your external telephone so you can hear the receiving fax machine answer before you press

Mono Start or Colour Start to begin transmission.

Menu mode

Programming mode for changing your machine’s settings.

OCR (optical character recognition)

ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR or Presto! PageManager software application converts an image of text to text you can edit.

One Touch

Keys on the machine’s control panel where you can store numbers for easy dialling. You can store a second number on each key if you press 21-40 and the

One Touch key together.

70

Out of Paper Reception

Receives faxes into the machine’s memory when the machine is out of paper.

Overseas Mode

Makes temporary changes to the fax tones to accommodate noise and static on overseas telephone lines.

Pause

Allows you to place a 2.8 second delay in the dialling sequence while you are dialling using the dial pad or while you are storing One Touch and Speed Dial numbers. Press Redial/Pause as many times as needed for longer pauses.

Polling

The process of a fax machine calling another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax messages.

Pulse

A form of rotary dialling on a telephone line.

Real Time Transmission

When memory is full, you can send faxes in real time.

Remaining Jobs

You can check which programmed fax jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel the jobs individually.

Remote Access Code

Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that allows you to call and access your machine from a remote location.

Remote Activation code

Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone.

Remote Retrieval Access

The ability to access your machine remotely from a touch tone telephone.

Resolution

The number of vertical and horizontal lines per inch.

Glossary

Ring Delay

The number of rings before the machine answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.

Ring Volume

Volume setting for the machine’s ring.

Scanning

The process of sending an electronic image of a paper document into your computer.

Search

An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored

One Touch, Speed Dial, Group numbers and LDAP.

Speed Dial

A pre-programmed number for easy dialling. Press Address Book, then enter the three-digit Speed Dial location, press Send a fax or Send a E-mail and press Mono Start or Colour Start to begin the dialling process.

Station ID

The stored information that appears on the top of faxed pages. It includes the sender’s name and fax number.

TAD (telephone answering device)

You can connect an external TAD to your machine.

Tel Index List

A listing of names and numbers stored in

One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in numerical order.

Temporary settings

You can choose certain options for each fax transmission and copy without changing the default settings.

Tone

A form of dialling on the telephone line used for Touch Tone telephones.

Transmission

The process of sending faxes over the telephone lines from your machine to the receiving fax machine.

C

71

User Settings List

A printed report that shows the current settings of the machine.

Xmit Report (Transmission Verification

Report)

A listing for each transmission, that shows its date, time and number.

72

D

Index

A

Apple Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide.

B

Broadcasting

............................................18

cancelling

..............................................19

setting up groups for

.............................38

C

Cancelling broadcast in process

.............................19

fax jobs in memory

................................21

fax storage

............................................26

jobs awaiting redial

...............................21

remote fax options

................................28

ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)

See Software User’s Guide.

ControlCenter4 (for Windows

®

)

See Software User’s Guide.

Copy

2 in 1 ID Copy

.......................................51

brightness

.............................................48

contrast

.................................................48

Enlarge/Reduce

....................................46

key

........................................................45

N in 1 (page layout)

..............................49

quality

...................................................45

sort (ADF only)

......................................49

temporary settings

................................45

using ADF

.............................................49

using scanner glass

..............................49

Cover page

..............................................22

custom comments

.................................22

for all faxes

...........................................23

printed form

...........................................23

D

Daylight Savings Time

............................... 1

Deep Sleep mode

...................................... 3

Delayed batch transmission

.....................20

Dialling groups (broadcasting)

.......................... 18

restricting dialling

................................. 13

Drum unit checking (remaining life)

...................... 55

Dual access

............................................. 17

Duplex copy

............................................. 47

E

Enlarge/Reduce

....................................... 46

F

Fax codes changing

............................................... 29

remote access code

............................. 29

Fax forwarding changing remotely

.......................... 30

,

31

programming a number

........................ 25

Fax storage

............................................. 26

printing from memory

........................... 34

turning off

............................................. 28

turning on

............................................. 26

Fax, stand-alone receiving fax forwarding

.............................. 25

,

31

fax receive stamp

.............................. 33

into memory (fax storage)

................. 26

polling receive

................................... 35

reducing to fit on paper

..................... 32

retrieving from a remote site

....... 30

,

31

to your PC

......................................... 27

sending

................................................. 15

broadcasting

...................................... 18

cancelling from memory

.................... 21

contrast

............................................. 16

delayed batch

.................................... 20

delayed fax

........................................ 20

from memory (dual access)

............... 17

manual

.............................................. 17

overseas

............................................ 20

polled transmit

................................... 24

real time transmission

....................... 19

resolution

........................................... 16

D

73

G

Groups for broadcasting

..........................38

H

HELP

........................................................44

Help List

................................................44

L

LCD (liquid crystal display) backlight brightness

................................3

Help List

................................................44

M

Machine information checking remaining life of parts

............55

page counts

..........................................54

Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide.

Maintenance, routine

...............................54

checking the remaining life of parts

......55

Manual transmission

..........................................17

Memory adding DIMM (option)

...........................66

installing

.............................................67

storage

....................................................1

N

N in 1 (page layout)

..................................49

Network faxing

See Software User’s Guide.

printing

See Network User’s Guide.

scanning

See Software User’s Guide.

P

Page layout (N in 1)

.................................49

PaperPort™ 12SE with OCR

See Software User’s Guide and Help in the

PaperPort™ 12SE application to access

How-to-Guides.

74

PC-Fax

See Software User’s Guide.

Polling polled transmit

...................................... 24

polling receive

...................................... 35

Power failure

............................................. 1

Presto! PageManager

See Software User’s Guide. See also Help in the Presto! PageManager application.

Print fax from memory

.................................. 34

reports

.................................................. 44

Printing

See Software User’s Guide.

Q

Quality copying

................................................. 45

Quick dial broadcasting

......................................... 18

using groups

...................................... 18

group dial setting up groups for broadcasting

.... 38

R

Redial/Pause key

.................................... 71

Reducing copies

................................................... 46

incoming faxes

..................................... 32

Remote retrieval

...................................... 29

access code

......................................... 29

commands

............................................ 31

getting your faxes

................................. 30

Remote setup

See Software User’s Guide.

Reports

.............................................. 43

,

44

Fax Journal

..................................... 43

,

44

journal period

.................................... 43

Help List

............................................... 44

how to print

........................................... 44

Network Configuration

.......................... 44

Tel Index List

........................................ 44

Transmission Verification

..................... 43

User Settings

........................................ 44

Resolution fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo)

.... 16

setting for next fax

................................ 16

Restricted users

........................................ 7

S

Scanning

See Software User’s Guide.

Security restricting dialling

..................................13

Secure function lock administrator password

........................6

Public user mode

................................. 7

restricted users

....................................7

Setting lock

...........................................11

Sleep mode

................................................2

Sort

..........................................................49

T

Temporary copy settings

..........................45

Timer for mode keys

..................................4

Toner Save

................................................2

W

Windows

®

See Software User’s Guide.

Wireless Network

See Quick Setup Guide and Network

User’s Guide.

75

D

This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.

advertisement

Key Features

  • Print, scan, copy and fax
  • Wireless networking
  • Automatic document feeder
  • Large touchscreen display
  • High-speed printing
  • High-resolution scanning

Frequently Answers and Questions

How do I load paper into the standard paper tray?
Open the standard paper tray and slide out the paper guides. Align the paper stack with the guides and push the paper stack to the back of the tray. Close the paper tray.
How do I send a fax?
Press the FAX button on the control panel. Enter the fax number you want to send to. Place the document face down in the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the scanner glass. Press the START button to send the fax.
How do I print a document from my computer?
Open the document you want to print on your computer. Select Print from the File menu. Choose your Brother machine as the printer. Click Print.

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents